cashier guide -...

244
TeamPOS Cashier Guide POINT ONE SOFTWARE V . 8.0

Upload: tranxuyen

Post on 23-May-2018

221 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

Cashier GuidePOINT ONE SOFTWARE V. 8.0

Page 2: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1
Page 3: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

Chapter 1 Introducing the cash register1.1 Training recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.2 The TeamPOS register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Using the register screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Using the cash drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Using the receipt printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Using the card reader on the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Using the card reader on the debit pinpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.3 Caring for the register and its components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.4 Operator numbers and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111.5 Signing on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121.6 Signing on in training mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.7 Exiting training mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.8 Ringing in items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Entering a CTC product number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Entering a UPC code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Entering non-inventory SKU numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Items without product numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Entering multiple items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Items with no fixed price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Items with links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22When the screen fills up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1.9 What’s next? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Chapter 2 Handling purchases2.1 Single tender transactions - cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.2 Single tender transactions - debit cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42.3 Single tender transactions – retail credit cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.4 Single tender transactions - CTC commercial credit cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112.5 Single tender transactions - cheque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142.6 Single tender transactions - CT ‘Money’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162.7 Single tender transactions - Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card . . . . . . . . 2-18

Cashier Guide i Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 4: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

2.8 Single tender transactions - gift card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192.9 Single tender transactions - gift certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2.10 Single tender transactions - traveler’s cheque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232.11 Single tender transactions - deferred credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-252.12 Single tender transactions - US tenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292.13 Single tender transactions - house account charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312.14 Single tender transactions - credit notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-322.15 Single tender transactions - instant credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342.16 Split tender transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Cash and CT ‘Money’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Cash and manufacturer’s coupon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Cash and CTC promo coupon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Cash and cheque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Cash and debit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Cash and credit card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Credit card and debit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card and other tenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Gift card and other tenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Chapter 3 Handling returnsIf extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued . . . . . . . 3-2Sample receipts with extra CT ‘Money’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Sample receipts with extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3If the reason code on a receipt does not appear in the “Extra CTM Reason” window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.1 Single tender returns - cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.2 Single tender returns - debit card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93.3 Single tender returns - credit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123.4 Single tender returns - gift cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163.5 Single tender returns - credit notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203.6 Single tender returns - deferred credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233.7 Split tender returns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Cash and credit card returns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Cash and debit card returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Debit card and credit card returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Cashier Guide ii Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 5: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

Gift card and other tenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-353.8 Mixed transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Chapter 4 Other situations4.1 Looking up CTM-OTC for a customer - swipe inquiry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

What is swipe inquiry? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2How to perform a stand-alone swipe inquiry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2 About taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Tax exempt purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Modify taxes on an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Surtaxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.3 CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Purchases exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card . . . . . . . 4-7Items exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4.4 About discounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Transaction discounts vs. item discounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Discountable vs. non-discountable items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Discounting taxes and CT ‘Money’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Transaction discount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on discounted price) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on undis-counted price) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4.5 Extra or reduced CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.6 Suspend/resume transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194.7 Cash advances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.8 Payment on account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Customer does not have card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234.9 Payment on house account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.10 Cashing cheques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-254.11 Deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Taking the deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Refunding a deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Handling a purchase when the customer has paid a deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Cashier Guide iii Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 6: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

4.12 Casting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274.13 Service Centre parts and invoices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Invoices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

4.14 Looking up a price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-294.15 Ringing in shop labour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304.16 Ringing in store labour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304.17 Environmental handling charge (EHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304.18 Accepting rain checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-324.19 Looking up a gift card balance for a customer - gift card inquiry . . . . . . . . . 4-33

What is gift card inquiry? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33How to perform a stand-alone gift card inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

4.20 Selling gift cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354.21 Selling loadable gift cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-374.22 Reloading gift cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-394.23 Voiding a gift card sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-404.24 Selling Auto Club cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-414.25 Ringing in gift registry products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Best practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-444.26 Refunding gift registry products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Chapter 5 Problems5.1 If you make a mistake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.2 Void prior transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.3 When an item is not in the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.4 When the message INVALID ENTRY appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.5 When the wrong price is in the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75.6 Signing on when the register is offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95.7 Ringing in items when the register is offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Scanning, entering a product or UPC number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Entering unit prices over $500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11SKU numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.8 When an incomplete receipt is printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Cashier Guide iv Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 7: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

Chapter 6 Administration6.1 Pickups and loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Paid outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 No sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.4 Opening the CT money drawer in the middle of a transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56.5 Opening the register drawers when signed off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56.6 Shift end procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66.7 Credit Start of Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76.8 Reloading register programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86.9 Reloading a new configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6.10 Initializing a debit pinpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106.11 Changing your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

To change your password when a message appears at the register . . . . . . . . 6-11To change your password when no message appears at the register . . . . . . . 6-12

6.12 Locking and unlocking your register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13To lock the register: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13To unlock the register: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6.13 Printing the Totals Reading (“Reads”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14To print the Totals Reading:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6.14 Using the IBM 4610 thermal printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Avoiding paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Printing the correct side of the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Printing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Loading paper into the receipt printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Replacing the ribbon in the document printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Cleaning the print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.15 Using the Symbol LS 9208 scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Setting the loudness of the beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Troubleshooting problems with the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Chapter 7 Quick references7.1 Debit card situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Credit card approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cashier Guide v Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 8: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Contents

7.3 Gift card and Auto Club card situations and error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.4 Transaction quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

vi Cashier Guide Retail Systems – February 2006

Page 9: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

1 Introducing the cash register

This manual is for both new and experienced cashiers who are learning to use the TeamPOS register.

The manual uses a hands-on approach, so that you can practise the procedures at a training register as you read about what to do.

1.1 Training recommendations

We suggest that you use the following approach if you are training on the TeamPOS register.

1. Read Chapter 1 to learn the basic features of the register and how to use it.

2. Sign on to the register in training mode, as described in section 1.6, “Signing on in training mode” on page 1-15.

3. Practise each procedure described in Chapters 2 and 3 while you are signed on to the register in training mode. (For your convenience, special account numbers have been set up for you to use while training. See page 1-17 for details.)

By the end of Chapter 3, you will be familiar with handling the most common purchases and returns.

To prepare for this, gather a few items from the store so that you have some merchandise to ring in.

4. Once you are familiar with the basics, go through Chapters 4, 5, and 6 to learn about other situations that can arise and how to fix problems that may occur. Continue to practise each procedure described in these chapters while you are signed on in training mode.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Page 10: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

The following table describes what is covered in each chapter:

Note: This manual is limited to describing the use of the cash register. Each store is responsible for acquainting new cashiers with store policies and procedures.

Chapter 1 Introduction - signing on, ringing in purchases, and an overview of handling purchases and returns.

Chapter 2 Purchases - using the various tender types.Chapter 3 Returns.Chapter 4 Other situations - tax modifications, castings, discounts,

cash advances, gift registry, swipe inquiry and more.Chapter 5 Problems - when the register is offline, problems signing on,

merchandise not in the system, incorrect price, correcting and voiding transactions.

Chapter 6 Administrative tasks - pickups and loans, paid outs, opening register drawers between transactions, shift-end procedures, changing your password.

Chapter 7 Quick References - handling credit card approvals, transaction overview.

1-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 11: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

The TeamPOS register

1.2 The TeamPOS register

The parts of the TeamPOS register are labeled below:

Display screen

Swivel Arm

Receipts print here

On/Off Switch is under

Magnetic Strip Reader

Cash Register Drawers

for reading credit cards

Keyboard

Openings in which to insertcredit card forms and

Insert forms to be printed here.The side facing UP isimprinted.

this cover

cheques

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 12: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

Using the register screenThe register screen is divided into 5 main sections by colour - green, white, gray, blue and yellow. The following picture describes what appears in each section:

This screen remains displayed all the while a cashier is signed on.

IThis area tells you what to do. It changes depending on the situation. When you scan a product or type a product number, itappears here.

This is the last item you rang in.

This is a running total of the customer’s purchase.

This is a list of all products you have rung in so far for this customer, with product number, description and price.

This is the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ to give the customer.

1-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 13: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

The TeamPOS register

Using the keyboard

The keys are colour-coded so that keys with similar functions are the same colour. You will learn the details about using each key later in this manual.

The Mgt key is used to display the menu, to remove the screen saver, and as a substitute for “OK” when you are responding to messages that appear on the screen.

The arrow key is used to backspace if you make a typing error.

The Trav Cheq/Cheque key and the Gift Cert/Gift Card key have two functions like a typewriter key. Use the key alone if you want the bottom function (cheques, gift cards). If you want the top function (traveler’s cheques, gift certificates) hold down the Shift key as you press Trav Cheque/Cheque or Gift Cert/Gift Card.

The Slip Print key also has two functions. Use the key alone to slip print as usual. Hold down the Shift key as you press Slip Print to print a duplicate receipt of the last transaction.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 14: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

Handling simple purchases requires only the number keys, the green key and the orange keys. The yellow and blue keys are used in special situations. The table below explains the different colour groupings.

You will learn the details of using these keys as you go through this manual.

Number Keys For entering numbers of any type, such as product numbers and dollar amounts. There is no decimal point on the keyboard because prices are always entered in cents. For example, for $12.99 type 1299. The system inserts the decimal point automatically.

Green Key Enter is the only green key. Use it after you have finished entering numbers.

Orange Keys The orange keys represent the different types of tender - cash, cheque, charge, debit card, traveler’s cheque, gift card, gift certificate, instant credit, U.S. cash. After entering the amount paid by the customer, you will need to press one of these keys to tell the system what method of payment to expect.

Yellow Keys The yellow keys are mainly problem correction keys. For example, if a price is incorrect, you can press Price Override. If you enter an incorrect item, you can use Item Correct to remove it. Shift allows you to access the top function on keys that are used for two purposes.

Blue Keys The blue keys are used in combination with the orange keys to indicate a special type of sale. For example, a customer may not be paying the normal taxes, or a discount may apply, or a customer may be purchasing an item associated with a gift registry or returning an item. These are just a few of the situations that can occur.

1-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 15: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

The TeamPOS register

Using the cash drawersThe cash drawers open automatically at the appropriate times. Inside each drawer is a tray that holds cash and Canadian Tire ‘Money’. To insert the tray into the cash drawer, keep the end of the tray that is closest to you raised slightly as you slide the tray into the drawer, then lower it. Otherwise, the tray will jam.

Using the receipt printerYou will need to learn how to insert forms into the printer and how to load a new roll of paper. This is covered in chapter 6.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 16: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

Using the card reader on the keyboard

The card reader (sometimes known as an MSR or Magnetic Strip Reader) on the keyboard reads credit card information from the magnetic strip on the back of the card. Swipe the card from left to right or from right to left. The magnetic strip should be facing away from you.

When you swipe a card successfully, the Accept light on the keyboard flashes and a beep sounds.

1-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 17: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

The TeamPOS register

Using the card reader on the debit pinpad

Customers paying with their debit card will swipe their card themselves through the card reader on the pinpad.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 18: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

1.3 Caring for the register and its components

1. Be careful with loose change around the registers. Coins could drop inside the receipt printer and cause severe damage. If a coin or anything else drops inside a printer, turn off the register’s power switch immediately.

Liquids can damage the register. Be sure not to place any food or drinks nearby.

2. Be careful not to force the receipt paper in either direction. Use the feed buttons.

3. Do not insert sticky notes or paper with staples or paper clips into the slip printer.

4. Overfilling the cash drawers could cause them to jam shut. Keep coin rolls below the top edge of the drawer insert.

5. Use a damp cloth to clean the scanner, printer and keyboard. Do not pour or spray water or cleaning liquids on them.

6. Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the screen. Do not spray any liquid directly onto the screen or the monitor casing. Do not touch the screen.

7. Do not plug any other equipment into the outlet the register is plugged into.

8. Be careful with the door on the front of the register. Pressing the 3 raised dots on the door causes it to open and it is easily broken off. If you open the door inadvertently, press the 3 raised dots again to latch it closed.

Door is open. (Your system will not have a diskette drive or CD drive.)

3 raised dots

1-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 19: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Operator numbers and passwords

1.4 Operator numbers and passwords

To operate the register, you will be given your own operator number and confidential password. To prevent unauthorized use of the registers, keep your password secret. Passwords must be at least 4 digits long and cannot exceed 10 digits. Depending on the policy at your store, you may need to change it at regular intervals. You will learn how to change your password in section 6.11, “Changing your password” on page 6-11.

Note: You can only enter your operator number and password at one register at a time. A message will appear if you try to sign on when you are already signed on to a register.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 20: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

1.5 Signing on

This section describes how to sign on in order to use the register. (If you want to use the register in training mode, go to section 1.6, “Signing on in training mode” on page 1-15 instead.)

When no-one is signed on at a register, the screen looks like this:

1. Press the Mgt key.

The following menu appears:

2. Type the number 1 and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Operator Number appears on the screen.

3. Type your operator number and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Password appears on the screen.

4. Type your password and press Enter.

The password is not displayed as you type (for confidentiality). If the message Invalid No. appears when you are signing on, enter your operator number and password again. If you still have problems, see your supervisor for assistance.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

1-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 21: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Signing on

The first person signing on each day will see one of two messages flash across the screen. If the line to Welland is up, the message Call In Progress appears. If the line to Welland is down, the message Start Of Day Failure appears. Others may see these messages as well, if they happen to sign on before the system has established the connection with Welland.

If the line to Welland is down, you can still use the register. Just press Enter to continue. Make sure the manager knows the line is down. Someone will need to perform the steps in section 6.7, “Credit Start of Day” on page 6-7.

The register drawers open. Put your cash and CT money in the appropriate drawer.The receipt printer will print information similar to the following on the register tape:

Your operator number and name will be printed in place of “12345678” and “Store Systems”. The message With New Float and the float totals only appear the first time you sign on during the day.Afterward, the receipt printer will print information similar to the following on the register tape each time you sign on:

SIGNON- #:12345678AT: 09/07/05 09:15:47WITH NEW FLOATCDN $ FLOAT: 100.00 US $ FLOAT: 0.00CT MONEY FLOAT: 75.00

SIGNON- #:12345678STORE SYSTEMSAT: 04/07/05 09:15:47WITH EXISTING FLOATTOTALS DOWNLOADED OK

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-13Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 22: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

The transaction screen appears:

The green area of the register screen displays the following:

The register is now ready for you to ring in items. The messages shown at the top of the screen tell you what to do next. As you work with the register, the message changes according to the situation. Get in the habit of checking this message as you work, especially if you are not sure of what to do next.

For information about what to do at the end of your shift, including how to sign off, see section 6.6, “Shift end procedures” on page 6-6.

Enter Product # Or Qty X Product

Using The ENTER Key

1-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 23: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Signing on in training mode

1.6 Signing on in training mode

Training mode is available on the register to allow you to practise various transactions without having them recorded.

To avoid accidental use of training mode, most stores allow only authorized users to put a register into training mode.

Note: You cannot practise using gift cards or debit cards when the register is in training mode.

1. Press the Mgt key.

The following menu appears

Type the number 2 and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Operator Number appears on the screen.

2. If your store requires special authorization to put the register into training mode, a manager/supervisor must enter his or her operator number. Otherwise, the cashier’s number can be entered.

The message Enter Your Password appears on the screen.

3. The person who typed the operator number in step 2 should now enter their password and press Enter.

The system now asks once more for the operator number and password. This time, the cashier-in-training should enter his or her operator number and password.

4. Type a cashier operator number and password, repeating steps 2 and 3. (Do this even if you just typed this information in steps 2 and 3.)

The message Sending Start Of Day appears briefly on the screen and the register drawers open.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-15Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 24: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

The receipt printer will print information similar to the following on the register tape:

Your operator number will be printed in place of “12345678”.The green area of the register screen displays the following: :

The register is now ready to use. The words Training Mode appear on the screen to remind you not to use the register for customers without signing off training mode.

The messages shown in the green area at the top right corner of the screen tell you what to do next. As you work with the register, the message changes according to the situation. Get in the habit of checking this message as you work, especially if you are not sure of what to do next.

SIGNON- #:12345678AT: 04/11/05 09:52:47

Enter Product # Or Qty X Product

Using The ENTER Key*** Training Mode ***

1-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 25: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Signing on in training mode

When you are in training mode, you can use the following account numbers in order to practise various transactions. (You have to enter the card numbers manually.) Some of the account numbers will generate a response code so you can practise what to do if that comes up with a customer.

ACCOUNT NUMBER RESPONSE CODE

EXPIRY DATE

Options MasterCard

5446120000000015 00 Any future date

5446120011856553 20 Any future date

5446120000000007 17 Any future date

5446120011856561 93 Any future date

Mastercard International

5488549999806827 00 Any future date

5000019999806820 20 Any future date

5583449999806824 21 Any future date

Visa International

4520230935796 00 Any future date

4520231000129 10 Any future date

4520241000002 20 Any future date

4520211512465 22 Any future date

CTC Commercial

5569640000712682 00 10/08

5569649997004342 20 11/08

5569640000712872 21 11/08

CTC Retail

1184701017 00 12/99

1184700985 10 12/99

1184700944 20 12/99

1184700969 21 12/99

1184701009 17 12/99

1184700993 93 12/99

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-17Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 26: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a credit card sale in training mode.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST. TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2005 08:55:09 TRANS #7OPERATOR #: 1*TRAINING MODE*3X29-3040-0 @ $ 9.99 EA.

MM COOLANT, 4L $ 29.9785-1020-4 BBQ,FOLDAWAY 18 $ 10.99(SAVED $ 4.00)

10% DISCOUNT $ -1.10$

S U B T O T A L $ 39.86TAX 1 $ 2.79TAX 2 $ 3.19T O T A L $ 45.84

CTA RTL #: 1184701017 EXP: 1299APPROVAL #: 00 000011

CTA RTL TEND $ 45.84BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ 0.72OTHER BONUS CT MONEY-CARD $ 1.00TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ 1.72CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE $ 1.72

TODAY YOU SAVED

$ 4.00 AT CANADIAN TIRE.

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIESGST#RT000000000

If any items purchased are on sale, the total amount saved appears at the bottom of the receipt. This amount does not include any other discounts. Also, this amount will not appear if the total savings is less than $0.50.

A bonus of $1.00 in CT ‘Money’ On The Card always appears in training mode.

This header always appears when you are in training mode.

Multiple items (in this case 3 items) are combined and appear on one line only.

This always appears when the item is on sale.

1-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 27: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Exiting training mode

1.7 Exiting training mode

To exit training mode:

1. Press the Mgt key.

2. Type the number 4.

3. Press Enter to sign off.

4. Press Mgt to continue.

The message *Training Totals Not Sent* is printed on the register receipt.

1.8 Ringing in items

You can ring in items in any of the following ways:

• scanning the item• entering the CTC product number• entering the UPC code • entering a non-inventory SKU number• pressing a blue key representing a purchase that has no number

assigned to it (such as shop labour, castings)

Check with your supervisor if you are not sure which methods are used at your store.

Note: Cashiers should check the register screen after ringing in an item to make sure the description matches the item purchased and that the price is correct.

ScanningPassing the UPC code from side to side in front of the scanner allows the register to recognize the product. The scanner beeps once, the green LED flashes on the top of the scanner, and the product description and price are displayed on the register screen.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-19Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 28: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

Leave the scanner in its stand unless a product is too heavy or bulky to put onto the counter. Then you can lift the scanner out of the stand and, grasping it carefully, scan the product’s bar code.

Do not touch products to the scanner - simply pass them across the front of the scanner. It is not necessary to pause products in front of the scanner. The scanner can read bar codes from about 8 inches away and at many different angles.

Best practice: Try to use a continuous movement to pass the product in front of the scanner and into the bag.

For more information about scanners, including what to do if you encounter a problem and how to change the volume of the beeps, refer to chapter 6.

Entering a CTC product numberYou can also ring in items by typing the Canadian Tire product number shown on the packaging or on a sticker on the item.

Type the product number and press Enter. For most items, the description and price are automatically displayed on the screen. In some cases, the system will ask you to enter the unit price. In these cases, type the price and press Enter.

1-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 29: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Ringing in items

Entering a UPC code• If an item does not have a Canadian Tire product number on it, you

can enter the numbers below the UPC symbol.• UPC symbols can have up to 14 digits.

Here is a sample UPC code:

• Never enter the check digit. (“6” in the example above)• If the prefix is zero, you do not have to enter it. Just enter the middle

digits of the UPC code (“123456789012” in the example above) and press the blue UPC key.

• If the prefix is not zero, you must enter it before entering the middle digits of the UPC number. Then press the blue UPC key.

• The system checks its cross-reference table and displays the corresponding 7-digit Canadian Tire product number, item description and price.

• If the prefix is a 4, the system uses the UPC number as the product number.

• If the system cannot find the UPC number, it displays the message UPC Code Not On File and Enter Product #. Press Enter to clear the message, or type the product number associated with this UPC code and press Enter.

Entering non-inventory SKU numbersItems that are not part of the regular store inventory, like fishing licences and towing, are rung in using SKU numbers. These numbers can be from 1 to 3 digits long. Each store has its own list of these non-inventory SKU numbers. Ask your supervisor if you are not familiar with the non-inventory SKU numbers used at your store. The register may prompt you to enter the price manually for non-inventory SKU items. Store labour for bike assembly is an example of a non-inventory SKU.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-21Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 30: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

To enter a non-inventory SKU item, type the number and press the blue Non-inv SKU key. If the message Enter Unit Price appears, type the unit price and press Enter. The item description and price are displayed on the screen.

Items without product numbersSome items, such as labour charges from the Service Centre, assembly or installation charges, have their own key assigned to them instead of a number. For example, to enter shop charges, type the dollar amount, press the Shop Labour key, and then press Enter.

Entering multiple itemsWhen a customer purchases more than one of the same item, enter the quantity and then press the X key (located under the Enter key). Then scan the item or enter one of its identifying numbers as explained in the previous sections.

You can also use the Repeat key to repeat the last key sequence. For example, if you just entered an item, pressing the Repeat key enters it again. (However, if you just made an error, pressing this key just repeats the error.)

Multiple items are combined on a receipt and appear on one line only. See the sample receipt on page 1-18.

Items with no fixed priceSome products that you ring in have no fixed price. This type of item can be set up in the system so that the register will request the unit price when the item is rung in. If you enter a unit price of over $500, the system asks for verification in case you made a mistake. If the price is correct, just press Mgt to continue. If you made a mistake, press Enter to clear the unit price and re-enter it.

Items with linksSometimes a product you have scanned or entered manually will have a link to one or more other items. For example, if a customer buys a tire, it may have a tire tax linked to it. If the tax is linked to the tire, the tax will appear whenever you ring in a tire.

When you scan or ring in a product that has links, the links appear on your screen and on the register receipt.

1-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 31: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

What’s next?

When setting up the links, a computer operator will be able to specify whether the links are automatic (they appear every time the product is entered) or if the register will ask to add the linked item. If you have to add a link, the following message will appear: Press <Mgt> to include XXX in transaction, or press <Void> if not applicable.

For example, if your store is running a special promotion on fishing poles and you are selling promotional fishing caps for $1.00, the register would prompt you to include the cap in the transaction. If the customer wants the cap, you would simply press Mgt, and the cap would appear automatically on your screen and on the register receipt for $1.00. If the customer does not want the cap, you would simply press Void and the link will not be processed.

There are many ways your store can use the linking feature. For example, it can be used for castings, assembly charges and special discounts.

When the screen fills upAs you continue to enter items, they are displayed one under the other in the yellow area on the upper left side of the register screen. Up to 20 items can be displayed at one time.

When you enter the 19th item, item 1 disappears, the rest of the items move up, and item 20 is added to the bottom of the list.

The best way to understand this is to try it out in training mode. Ring in a variety of items and observe what happens when the screen fills up.

1.9 What’s next?

You are now ready for hands-on training. Sign on in training mode as described in section 1.6, “Signing on in training mode” on page 1-15. You can practise transactions as you work through the remaining chapters of this book.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-23Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 32: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Introducing the cash register

1-24 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 33: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

2 Handling purchases

This chapter describes the detailed steps for handling each type of tender that customers may use when paying for purchases.

We recommend trying each type of transaction on the training register as you read. Pick up a variety of items off the shelf to ring in while practising.

This chapter describes how to handle the following types of tenders:

• cash• debit card• cheque• credit cards• CT ‘Money’• Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card• gift cards• gift certificates• traveler’s cheques• US cash• deferred credit• house account charges• credit notes• Canadian Tire promo coupons• manufacturer coupons

To make it easier to learn, each of these tender types is described first as a single tender transaction. Beginning on page 1-35 you will find some examples of split tender transactions.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-1Retail Systems – January 2006G:\Qaa\2_Production\POS\Cashier Guide\English\Reg.ch2

Page 34: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.1 Single tender transactions - cash

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash.

or

If the customer gives you the exact change, just press Cash twice instead of entering the amount.

The amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

3. Remove the change, if any, and the CT ‘Money’. Then close the register drawers.

4. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

2-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 35: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - cash

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a cash sale.

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount is issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.52

T O T A L $ 93.70

CASH TEND $ 100.00

CHANGE $ 6.30

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-3Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 36: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.2 Single tender transactions - debit cards

Follow these instructions when customers are paying for their purchase using their debit card.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Debit Card.

The message Enter Debit Card Amt: appears.

3. If the customer is putting more than the amount of the purchase on the debit card, type the amount requested and press Enter.

or

If the customer is putting the exact amount of the purchase on the debit card, just press Debit Card again without typing the amount.

Note: The amount of money a customer can put on a debit card over and above the amount of the purchase varies among stores. If you are not sure of the policies at your store, ask your supervisor.

The message Customer Input Required appears.

4. The customer must now:a. swipe the debit card through the customer pinpad. b. authorize the amount owing by pressing OK.c. select an account by pressing CHEQ or SAV.d. enter a personal identification (PIN) number and press OK.

If the customer makes a mistake, messages appear at the pinpad and the message Retry Requested may appear at the register. For more information about possible error situations, see section 7.1, “Debit card situations” on page 7-2.

When the customer enters everything correctly, the message Call in progress... Please wait appears.

5. If the transaction is approved, the message Debit Transaction Approved appears, the customer receipt is printed, the amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed, and the register drawers open. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

6. The message Press <Mgt> - Done, <Void> - Print another appears. Usually you will just press Mgt. However, if the printer jams you can print another customer receipt by pressing Void.

2-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 37: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - debit cards

7. Remove the change, if any, and the CT ‘Money’. Then close the register drawers.

The register is ready for the next sale.

For each debit transaction, a transaction record is attached to the register receipt. This part of the receipt shows the details of the purchase:

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2003 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.52

T O T A L $ 93.70

DEBIT CARD #: 45190359****7669CARD READAPPROVAL #: 896073

DEBIT TEND $ 93.70

CHANGE $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-5Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 38: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

This part of the receipt shows the customer’s transaction record:

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

====================================================DEBIT CARD TRANSACTION RECORD

====================================================

CANADIAN TIRE STORE # 9992180 YONGE STREETTORONTO, ONTARIO

M4P 2V8

ROYAL BANK: 3333333333

OPERATOR: 1 REG #:3 TRANS #:7

TYPE: PURCHASE ---------------------------------------ACCT: CHEQUING $ 93.70 ---------------------------------------

CARD NUMBER: 45190359****766904/14/2003 08:55:09REFERENCE: 60909358 0010012600

00 APPROVED - THANK YOU

AUTHORIZATION: 896073

2-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 39: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions – retail credit cards

2.3 Single tender transactions – retail credit cards

The following types of credit cards are valid:

• Canadian Tire retail cards• VISA• MasterCard• Options MasterCard• American Express

To practise charge transactions while in training mode, use the card numbers shown on page 1-17.

Remember: Anytime customers use a Canadian Tire Retail Card or Options MasterCard to pay for merchandise, they have the option to redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card. Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card will be issued on the full purchase price, regardless of the amount redeemed.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)When you get the authorization code, the message Imprint card using three-part form. Press <Mgt> when done appears.

c. Imprint the card on the three-part form and then press the Mgt key. When all tenders have been entered, the message Insert form - CT M/C. Press <Mgt> when ready appears.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-7Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 40: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

d. Insert the three-part form in the slip printer and then press the Mgt key.

4. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the message Enter CTM-OTC Redemption Amount: appears.a. If the customer is not redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card, press Enter and skip steps 4b and 4c.b. If the customer asks how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card he or she has:- Press Inquiry. - Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the transaction.- Go on to step 4c if the customer decides to redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

c. If the customer is redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, type the amount and press Enter. If the customer’s balance is less than the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card entered, the message CT ‘Money’ On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xx. Insufficient CTM On The Card - Retry appears. Press Enter to clear the screen and type a lower amount to redeem. (Or just press Enter to not redeem any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.)

Regardless of the credit card used, if the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer’s signature.

5. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

6. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

2-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 41: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions – retail credit cards

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a credit card sale.

If bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card is awarded, it will also appear on the receipt.

Note: If you enter a CT retail card account number manually, without entering the prefix 600627 first, only the first 3 and last 3 digits of the account number will appear on the customer receipt.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #: 3 04/14/2001 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CTA RTL #: ***********2222

CUSTOMER NAME

CARD READ

APPROVAL #: 00 123456

CTA RTL TEND $ 91.99

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD 2.28

CT MONEY ON CARD BALANCE

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

All but the last four digits of the account number are blocked out on the customer receipt. The full account number appears on the store copy.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-9Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 42: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

This is the store copy of the credit card receipt.

If bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card is awarded, it will also appear on the receipt.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

O F F I C E C O P Y

CTA RTL SALE $ 91.99

ACCOUNT: 60062722211111111

CUSTOMER NAME

APPROVAL #: 00 123456

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD: 2.28

SIGNATURE: X_____________________________________

PHONE #: ______________________________________

2-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 43: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - CTC commercial credit cards

2.4 Single tender transactions - CTC commercial credit cards

Follow these instructions for Canadian Tire commercial credit cards.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If

there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

4. Type a purchase order number and press Enter. (If you do not have a purchase order number, just press Enter.)

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The receipts for commercial credit cards show the invoice number, and both copies have a space for the customer’s signature.

5. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

6. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-11Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 44: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a commercial credit card sale.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CTA CMCL #: *********2001

CUSTOMER NAME

APPROVAL #: 08 000000INV #: 50010012PURCHASE ORDER #: 1234567890

SIGNATURE: X_________________________________

CTA CMCL TEND $ 91.99

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 45: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - CTC commercial credit cards

This is the store copy of the credit card receipt.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

O F F I C E C O P Y

CTA CMCL TEND $ 91.99

ACCOUNT: 8100000002001

CUSTOMER NAME

APPROVAL #: 08 000000INV #: 50010012PURCHASE ORDER #: 1234567890

SIGNATURE: X___________________________________

PHONE #: ______________________________________

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-13Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 46: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.5 Single tender transactions - cheque

Cheque acceptance varies among stores. In general, three situations can occur:

• cheques are only accepted from customers with CTC credit cards• cheques are accepted from customers with other credit cards• cheques are accepted without requiring a credit card

As well, some stores may accept cheques for more than the amount of the purchase, while others may not. If you are not sure of the cheque acceptance policies at your store, ask your supervisor.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. If the cheque is for the exact amount of the purchase, just press Cheque twice.

or

Enter the amount of the cheque and press Cheque.

3. If the message Enter Account Number appears, follow step 3a or 3b depending on the situation at your store.

Step 3a: Cheques are accepted from customers with a CTC card.1) Swipe the card.or Type the account number and press Enter. (You have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)2) If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

Step 3b: Cheques are accepted from customers with non-CTC credit cards or without requiring a credit card.1) Press Mgt when the message Enter Account Number is displayed. The list of charge account types appears.2) Type 99 and press Enter to select “No Card”.3) If you do require a credit card, follow the manual procedures in effect at your store to validate it.

2-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 47: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - cheque

4. Insert the cheque face down into the printer and press the Mgt key. Remove the cheque when printing stops. The amount of change (if any) and CT ‘Money’ out is displayed.

5. Close the drawers after removing the change and CT ‘Money’ and inserting the cheque.

6. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a cheque sale

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

CHEQUE TEND $ 93.70

CHANGE $ .00

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-15Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 48: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.6 Single tender transactions - CT ‘Money’

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ tendered and press CT Money In.

or

If the customer gives you the exact change, just press CT Money In instead of entering the amount.

If the amount of CT ‘Money’ covers the full purchase amount, the amount of change in CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open. If the exact change cannot be given in CT ‘Money’ because of limited denominations, the system will issue the remaining change in cents.

If the amount of CT ‘Money’ is less than the amount of the purchase, complete the transaction using another form of tender. For more information about handling split-tender transactions see section 2.16, “Split tender transactions” on page 2-35.

3. Remove the CT ‘Money’ and change, if any. Then close the register drawers.

4. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

2-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 49: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - CT ‘Money’

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a CT ‘Money’ sale

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

CT MONEY TEND $ 94.00

CT MONEY CHANGE $ 0.30

CHANGE $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-17Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 50: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.7 Single tender transactions - Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card

Customers can opt to pay for purchases using Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card as the only tender. The steps for this are the same as for the Canadian Tire retail card or Options MasterCard. For details, refer to the steps on page 1-7. Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card will be issued on the full purchase price, regardless of the amount redeemed.

2-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 51: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - gift card

2.8 Single tender transactions - gift card

Gift cards earn CT ‘Money’ when customers use them to purchase products, just like cash. Customers can spend some or all of the amount on the gift card. The system keeps track of the balance remaining on the card. Customer receipts show the current balance on the gift card and when the gift card expires.

You cannot accept a gift card when the register is offline because the register must communicate with Canadian Tire Financial Services to find out the balance remaining on the card. This information is not stored on the card.

It is possible to swipe the same gift card twice in a transaction (if, for example, the customer asks to use $10 of the gift card amount and then wants to use another $5.)

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

3. Swipe the gift card.

or

Type the 19 numbers on the gift card and press Enter.

Note: In some stores, a supervisor’s password is required if the cashier enters the numbers on the gift card instead of swiping it.

The message Enter Redemption Amount appears.

4. Press Gift Card again.

The message Call in progress - Please Wait appears.

The message Approved - XXXXXX appears.

The amount of CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed.

5. Remove the CT ‘Money’ and close the register drawers.

If the gift card is less than the purchase, complete the transaction using another form of tender. For more information about handling split-tender transactions, refer to section 2.16, “Split tender transactions” on page 2-35.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-19Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 52: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

If the entire amount of the gift card is redeemed, the message Gift card balance is zero, inform customer and dispose of card appears.

When this message appears, tell the customer that the gift card has been fully redeemed and that the balance is zero.

6. Tear off the receipt and give that and the CT ‘Money’ to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a gift card redemption.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 05/13/2005 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

GIFT CARD REDEEMED $ 93.70

GIFT CARD BALANCE: $ 6.30

GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 12 MAY 2004

CHANGE $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 53: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - gift certificate

2.9 Single tender transactions - gift certificate

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of the gift certificate and then hold down the Shift key as you press Gift Cert.

3. If the gift certificate value covers the purchase, the amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed. Remove the change and CT ‘Money’, if any, and close the register drawers. or

If the gift certificate is less than the purchase, complete the transaction using another form of tender. For more information about handling split-tender transactions, refer to section 2.16, “Split tender transactions” on page 2-35.

4. Insert the gift certificate face down into the printer and press Mgt to imprint it with the totals, and then file the gift certificate.

5. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Note: The amount by which the gift certificate can be more than the purchase price varies among stores. If you are not sure of the policies at your store, ask your supervisor.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-21Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 54: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a gift certificate sale.

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

GIFT CERT TEND $ 100.00

CHANGE $ 6.30

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 55: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - traveler’s cheque

2.10 Single tender transactions - traveler’s cheque

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of the traveler’s cheque, hold down the Shift key as you press Trav Cheq.

3. If the traveler’s cheque covers the purchase, the amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed. Remove the change and CT ‘Money’, if any. Then close the register drawers.

or

If the traveler’s cheque is less than the purchase, complete the transaction using another form of tender. For more information about handling split-tender transactions, refer to section 2.16, “Split tender transactions” on page 2-35.

4. Insert the traveler’s cheque face down into the printer and press Mgt to imprint it with the totals, and then file it.

5. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-23Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 56: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a traveler’s cheque sale.

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

TRAV CHEQUE TEN $ 100.00

CHANGE $ 6.30

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-24 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 57: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - deferred credit

2.11 Single tender transactions - deferred credit

There are times when a store or CTFS will allow customers extra time to pay for a product (90 days, for example). This situation is referred to as using “deferred credit”.

Handling a deferred credit transaction is the same as handling a normal charge except that you press the Deferred key before processing the charge.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Deferred.

A “d” appears on the screen as confirmation that Deferred was pressed.

3. Press Charge twice.

4. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you also have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.

5. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the message Enter CTM-OTC Redemption Amount: appears.a. If the customer is not redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card, press Enter and skip steps 5b and 5c.b. If the customer asks how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card he or she has:- Press Inquiry. - Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the transaction.- Go on to step 5c if the customer decides to redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

c. If the customer is redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, type the amount and press Enter.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-25Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 58: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

If the customer’s balance is less than the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card entered, the message CT Money On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xx. Insufficient CTM On The Card - Retry appears. Press Enter to clear the screen and type a lower amount to redeem. (Or just press Enter to not redeem any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.)

Regardless of the credit card used, if the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer’s signature.

6. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

7. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

2-26 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 59: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - deferred credit

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a deferred credit sale.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CTA RTL #: *************1111

CUSTOMER NAME

APPROVAL #: 08 000000

DFR CTA RTL TE $ 91.99

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ 2.28

CT MONEY ON CARD BALANCE WILL BE UPDATEDON YOUR NEXT TRANSACTION OR STATEMENT

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-27Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 60: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

This is the store copy of the deferred credit receipt.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

O F F I C E C O P Y

DFR CTA RTL TEN $ 91.99

ACCOUNT: 60062722211111111

CUSTOMER NAME

APPROVAL #: 08 000000

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD: 2.28

SIGNATURE: X_____________________________________

PHONE #: ______________________________________

2-28 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 61: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - US tenders

2.12 Single tender transactions - US tenders

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press US Tender.

A “u” appears on the screen as confirmation that US Tender was pressed.

3. Type the amount tendered and press Cash.

A line showing the conversion to Canadian funds appears on the screen, and the transaction continues normally.

The amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

4. Remove the CT ‘Money’, and change, if any. Then close the register drawers.

5. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Some stores may accept cash, cheques or traveler’s cheques in US funds. If your store accepts them, treat these tenders as described above, but press the orange Cheque or Shift, Trav cheque keys instead of the Cash key and complete the transaction as you would for Canadian tenders.

Ask your supervisor if you are not sure of the types of US tenders your store accepts, if any.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-29Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 62: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a US tender.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

US CASH TEND $ 100.00

@ $ 1.25 US EXCHANGE $ 25.00

CHANGE $ 33.01

BASE CT MONEY 1.90

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-30 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 63: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - house account charge

2.13 Single tender transactions - house account charge

House accounts are running accounts with certain local businesses. House account customers are usually billed once a month instead of paying for each purchase. This allows employees of the business to make the required purchases without having to pay each time.

Your supervisor can tell you the procedures for house accounts used at your store, including what paperwork, if any, the customer must provide, as well as the method of determining the house account number.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Press Mgt to display a list of card types.

4. Type the number 5 and press Enter to select “House”.

5. Type the house account number and press Enter. (House account numbers can be up to five digits long.)

6. Type the expiry date of the house account card and press Enter. (If you do not have an expiry date, just type four zeros instead.)

7. Each store has its own procedures for completing a house account transaction. Your supervisor can tell you what to do at your store.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-31Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 64: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.14 Single tender transactions - credit notes

Customers can redeem a previously issued credit note to pay for purchases.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of the credit note.

3. Press Cr Note Redeem.

4. If the credit note is for less than the purchase, the amount due is displayed. Complete the transaction using another form of tender. For more information about handling split-tender transactions, refer to section 2.16, “Split tender transactions” on page 2-35.

or

If the credit note is for more than the purchase, press Cash twice. A message will appear on the screen to tell you what to do next - issue another credit note for the balance or give the customer change in cash. Issuing credit notes is described in section 3.5, “Single tender returns - credit notes” on page 3-20.

Whenever you have split tenders with credit notes, you MUST process the credit note first, before any other tenders.

2-32 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 65: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender transactions - credit notes

Here is an example of a typical customer receipt for a credit note redemption.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CREDIT NOTE TEN $ 50.00

CASH TEND $ 41.99

CHANGE $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY 1.90

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-33Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 66: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2.15 Single tender transactions - instant credit

Note: This transaction is for future use and is not currently available.

“Instant Credit” is the program allowing customers who have a valid VISA or MasterCard to request a Canadian Tire credit card. Customers can make a purchase on the new CTC card at this time if they want to.

1. Ring in the items purchased, if any, and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Instant Credit twice.

3. Swipe the VISA or MasterCard card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter.b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter.

If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, refer to section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

4. If the system asks you to insert a form, place it face up into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the form when printing stops.

5. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the form.

6. Give back the credit card and the customer’s copy of the form.

The register is ready for the next sale.

2-34 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 67: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

2.16 Split tender transactions

The most common situation where a customer uses two tender types is CT ‘Money’ in combination with another tender type. However, payment can be made using up to ten types of tender.

The procedure for handling split tenders is exactly the same as handling a single tender type. Each tender is handled sequentially until payment is complete.

The following examples illustrate the procedure.

Cash and CT ‘Money’1. Ring in the items purchased.

2. Enter the amount of CT ‘Money’ tendered and press CT Money In.

3. At this point, you may want to put the CT ‘Money’ in the CT ‘Money’ drawer to avoid confusion as follows:a. Press CT Money Drawer to open the drawer.b. Put away the CT ‘Money’ and close the drawer.

4. Tell the customer the balance due.

5. If the customer gives you the exact change, press Cash twice.

or

Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash.

The amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

6. Close the drawers after removing the change and CT ‘Money’.

7. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Other tender types combined with CT ‘Money’ are handled in the same way - usually you enter the CT ‘Money’ first so the customer knows the balance due, and then handle the balance with the other tender type or types.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-35Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 68: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a cash and CT ‘Money’ sale.

The receipt shows the regular amount of CT ‘Money’ issued (Base CT ‘Money’), as well as any extra CT ‘Money’, multipliers, or money makers that may have been issued. The total CT ‘Money’ is printed as well whenever more than the base amount was issued.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 SS10W30 $ 1.49

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 81.48

TAX 1 $ 5.70

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 93.70

CT MONEY TEND $ 5.00

CASH TEND $ 90.00

CHANGE $ 1.30

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-36 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 69: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

Cash and manufacturer’s couponA manufacturer’s coupon is any coupon issued by the manufacturer, and can be found on products, displays, in coupon flyers, or newspapers.

1. Ring in the items purchased.

2. Enter the amount of the coupons tendered and press Manufac Coupon. Tell the customer the balance due.

3. If the customer gives you the exact change, press Cash twice.

or

Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash.

The amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

4. If you see the message Insert Form - Manu Coupon #1. Press <Mgt> When Ready, insert the coupon face down into the printer and press Mgt. Remove the coupon when printing stops.

5. Close the drawers after removing the change and CT ‘Money’.

6. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Note: Manufacturers’ coupons are deducted from the after tax total. For example, a customer purchases an item for $14.48. After tax, the total is $16.65. A $1.00 manufacturer’s coupon is then deducted, so the customer pays $15.65.

Other tender types combined with manufacturers’ coupons are handled in the same way - usually you enter the coupon first so the customer knows the balance due, and then handle the balance with the other tender type or types.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-37Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 70: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Cash and CTC promo couponA CTC promo coupon is any coupon issued by Canadian Tire. This includes promo coupons from the catalogue and Gas Bar.

1. Ring in the items purchased.

2. Enter the amount of the promo coupon, press CTC Promo and tell the customer the balance due.

3. If the customer gives you the exact change, press Cash twice.

or

Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash.

The amount of change and CT ‘Money’ to give the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

4. If you see the message Insert Form - CTC Promo. Press Mgt Key When Ready, insert the coupon face down into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the coupon when printing stops.

5. Close the drawers after removing the change and CT ‘Money’.

6. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Note: CTC promo coupons are deducted from the total before tax. For example, a customer purchases an item for $14.48. A $1.00 CTC promo coupon is deducted. Tax is calculated on $13.48. The customer pays $15.50.

Other tender types combined with CTC Promo coupons are handled in the same way - you must enter the coupon first so the customer knows the balance due, and then handle the balance with the other tender type or types.

2-38 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 71: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

Cash and cheque1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash. Tell the customer the remaining balance due.

3. If the cheque is made out for the exact amount of the purchase, just press Cheque twice.

or

Enter the amount of the cheque and press Cheque.

4. If the message Enter Account Number appears, follow step 4a or 4b depending on the situation at your store.

5. Insert the cheque face down into the printer and press the Mgt key. Remove the cheque when printing stops. The amount of change (if any) and CT ‘Money’ due is displayed and the cash register drawers open.

6. Close the drawers after removing the change and CT ‘Money’ and inserting the cheque.

Step 4a: Cheques are accepted from customers with a CTC card.1) Swipe the card.or Type the account number and press Enter. (You have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)2) Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)3) If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

Step 4b: Cheques are accepted from customers with non-CTC credit cards or without requiring a credit card.1) When the message Enter Account Number appears, press Mgt. The list of charge account types appears.2) Type 99 and press Enter to select “No Card”.3) If you do require a credit card, follow the manual procedures in effect at your store to validate it.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-39Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 72: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

7. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

The above instructions cover the case where a customer writes a personal cheque to cover the balance due. The reverse situation can also occur, where a customer gives you a government cheque and wants to pay the remainder in cash. In that case, just reverse the steps and handle the cheque portion first.

Cash and debit card1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash. Tell the customer the remaining balance due.

3. If the customer is paying the remainder with a single debit card, press Debit Card twice.

or

If the customer will be using more than one debit card, type the amount to be paid by the first card and press Debit Card once.

The message Customer Input Required appears.

4. The customer must now:a. swipe the debit card through the customer pinpad. b. authorize the amount owing by pressing OK.c. select an account by pressing CHEQ or SAV.d. enter a personal identification (PIN) number and press OK.

If the customer makes a mistake, messages appear at the pinpad and the message Retry Requested may appear at the register. For more information about possible error situations, see section 7.1, “Debit card situations” on page 7-2.

When the customer enters everything correctly, the message Call in progress... Please wait appears.

2-40 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 73: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

5. If the transaction is approved, the message Debit Transaction Approved appears and the customer receipt is printed. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

6. The message Press <Mgt> - Done, <Void> - Print another appears. Usually you will just press Mgt. However, if the printer jams you can print the customer receipt again by pressing Void.

7. If the customer is using a second debit card, process it like the first debit card. (Return to step 3.)

8. Give the customer the CT ‘Money’ or cashback (if applicable) that is due.

The register is now ready for the next sale.

These instructions cover the case where a customer pays an amount in cash and the balance with one or more debit cards. The reverse situation can also occur, where a customer pays with one or more debit cards first and the balance in cash.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-41Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 74: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Cash and credit card1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of cash tendered and press Cash. Tell the customer the remaining balance due.

3. If the customer is paying the remainder with a single credit card, press Charge twice.

or

If the customer will be using more than one credit card, type the amount to be charged to the first card and press Charge once.

4. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

5. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the message Enter CTM-OTC Redemption Amount: appears.a. If the customer is not redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card, press Enter and skip steps 5b and 5c.b. If the customer asks how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card he or she has:- Press Inquiry. - Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the transaction.- Go on to step 5c if the customer decides to redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

c. If the customer is redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, type the amount and press Enter. If the customer’s balance is less than the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card entered, the message CT Money On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xx. Insufficient CTM On The Card - Retry appears. Press Enter to clear the screen and type a lower amount to redeem. (Or just press Enter to not redeem any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.)

2-42 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 75: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

Regardless of the credit card used, if the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, refer to section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer’s signature.

6. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

7. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

8. If the customer is using a second credit card, process it like the first credit card.

These instructions cover the case where a customer pays an amount in cash and the balance with one or more credit cards. The reverse situation can also occur, where a customer pays with one or more credit cards first and the balance in cash.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-43Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 76: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Credit card and debit card1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount to be processed on the credit card and press Charge.

3. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

4. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the message Enter CTM-OTC Redemption Amount: appears.a. If the customer is not redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card, press Enter and skip steps 4b and 4c.b. If the customer asks how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card he or she has:- Press Inquiry. - Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the transaction.- Go on to step 4c if the customer decides to redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

c. If the customer is redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, type the amount and press Enter. If the customer’s balance is less than the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card entered, the message CT Money On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xx. Insufficient CTM On The Card - Retry appears. Press Enter to clear the screen and type a lower amount to redeem. (Or just press Enter to not redeem any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.)

Regardless of the credit card used, if the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, refer to section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

2-44 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 77: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer’s signature.

5. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

6. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

7. If the customer is using a second credit card, process it like the first credit card. (Return to step 3.)

8. If the customer is paying the remainder with a single debit card, press Debit Card twice.

or

If the customer will be using more than one debit card, type the amount to be charged to the first card and press Debit Card once.

The message Customer Input Required appears.

9. The customer must now:a. swipe the debit card through the customer pinpad. b. authorize the amount owing by pressing OK.c. select an account by pressing CHEQ or SAV.d. enter a personal identification (PIN) number and press OK.

If the customer makes a mistake, messages appear at the pinpad and the message Retry Requested may appear at the register. For more information about possible error situations, refer to section 7.1, “Debit card situations” on page 7-2.

When the customer enters everything correctly, the message Call in progress... Please wait appears.

10. If the transaction is approved, the message Debit Transaction Approved appears and the customer receipt is printed. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

11. The message Press <Mgt> - Done, <Void> - Print another appears. Usually you will just press Mgt. However, if the printer jams you can print the customer receipt again by pressing Void.

12. If the customer is using a second debit card, process it like the first debit card. (Return to step 9.)

13. Give the customer the CT ‘Money’ or cashback (if applicable) that is due.

The register is ready for the next transaction.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-45Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 78: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

These instructions cover the case where a customer pays an amount using one or more credit cards and then pays the balance with one or more debit cards. The reverse situation can also occur, where a customer pays with one or more debit cards first and the balance with one or more credit cards. Customers can use the cards in any order they prefer.

Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card and other tendersCustomers can redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card on any purchase. They must present their Canadian Tire Retail Card or Options MasterCard to redeem, and complete the transaction using any tender. Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card will be issued on the amount redeemed.

Note: To practise this type of transaction while in training mode, use the card numbers shown on page 1-17.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Type the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card the customer wants to redeem and press Charge.

3. Swipe the customer’s CTC retail card or Options MasterCard.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the credit card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

2-46 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 79: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

The message Enter CTM-OTC Redemption Amount: appears.

4. Type the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card the customer is redeeming and press Enter. (Type the same amount you typed in step 2.)

If the customer’s balance is less than the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card entered, the message CT Money On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xx. Insufficient CTM On The Card - Retry appears. Press Enter to clear the screen and type a lower amount to redeem. (Or just press Enter to not redeem any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.)

If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see section 7.2, “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

5. Press the tender key for whatever tender the customer is using for the remainder of the transaction.

6. Complete the transaction as usual.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt shows the amount being redeemed and has a space for the customer’s signature.

7. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

8. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

You can ring in tenders in any order - it is not necessary to ring in Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card first.

If the customer asks how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card he or she has:- Press Inquiry.- Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the next step.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-47Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 80: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Here is an example of a customer receipt for a sale paid for using Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card and cash:

In this example, the customer redeemed $10.00 Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card and paid the remainder in cash. “Base CT ‘Money’ On The Card” is calculated on the amount of Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card redeemed as well as on the amount paid in cash.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CT MONEY ON CARD REDEEMED $ 10.00

CTA RTL #: ***********2222 CUSTOMER NAMECARD READ

APPROVAL #: 00 099364

CTA RTL TEND $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD: 0.24

CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE: 5.91

CASH TEND. $ 85.00

CHANGE $ 3.01

BASE CT MONEY $ 1.70THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIRE

PLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

2-48 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 81: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

This is the store copy of the credit card receipt.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2000 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

O F F I C E C O P Y

CTA RTL TEND $ 0.00

CT MONEY ON CARD REDEEMED $ 10.00

ACCOUNT: 600627111122222 CUSTOMER NAMECARD READ

APPROVAL #: 00 099364

BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD: 0.24

SIGNATURE: X___________________________________

PHONE #: ______________________________________

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-49Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 82: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

Gift card and other tendersCustomers can use any other tender(s) in addition to a gift card to pay for their purchase. Customers can also use multiple gift cards in a single transaction.

You can ring in the tenders in any order. CT ‘Money’ will be issued on the gift card amount.

1. Ring in the items purchased and tell the customer the balance due.

2. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

3. Swipe the gift card.

or

Type the 19 numbers on the gift card and press Enter.

Note: In some stores, a supervisor’s password is required if the cashier enters the numbers on the gift card instead of swiping it.

The message Enter Redemption Amount appears.

4. Type the amount to be paid using the gift card and press Enter.

The message Call in progress - Please Wait appears.

If the gift card balance is less than the redemption amount entered, the register displays a warning message.

If the gift card balance is sufficient, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved, see section 7.3, “Gift card and Auto Club card situations and error messages” on page 7-6 for instructions.

5. Press the tender key for whatever tender the customer is using for the remainder of the transaction.

6. Complete the transaction as usual.

7. Give back the gift card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

If the customer asks how much is left on the gift card:- Press Inquiry.- Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.- Press Enter to clear the screen and continue with the next step.

2-50 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 83: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender transactions

Here is an example of a customer receipt for a sale paid for using a gift card and cash:

In this example, the customer redeemed $10.00 from a gift card and paid the remainder in cash. CT ‘Money’is calculated on the amount redeemed on the gift card as well as on the amount paid in cash.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.

TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 05/13/2005 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

88-1224-4 TABLE, PICNIC $ 79.99

S U B T O T A L $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

GIFTCARD REDEEMED $ 10.00

GIFT CARD BALANCE: $10.90

GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 12 MAY 2004

CASH TEND. $ 81.99

CHANGE $ 0.00

BASE CT MONEY $ 1.70

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 2-51Retail Systems – January 2006

Page 84: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling purchases

2-52 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – January 2006

Page 85: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

3 Handling returns

This chapter describes the detailed steps for handling customer returns. Handling returns uses the same procedures as handling purchases, except that you must press Mdse Return before ringing in the returned items.

Handle exchanges as two separate transactions (a return and then a purchase) instead of a mixed transaction. Each store has its own policy about handling returns. Check with your supervisor to find out the procedure at your store.

We recommend that you practise each type of transaction on the training register as you read. Pick up a variety of items off the shelf to ring in while practising.

At all stores, refunds can be made in any of the following ways:

• cash• credit on a credit card• credit note• money refunded onto a gift card• mixture of these methods

Some stores have been configured to use all tenders for returns.

Cash is always given when refunding a debit card purchase. It is not currently possible to refund directly to the customer’s account.

TIPS: 1. If the customer is returning more than one item, you can press Mdse Return and then press Enter to put the register into “return mode”. That way, you don't have to press Mdse Return before ringing in each item. You will see the words “Retn Mode” at the top of the screen.To return the register to normal, press Mdse Return and Enter once more. The words “Retn Mode” disappear.2. If a customer is returning defective merchandise, check with your supervisor to find out the policy at your store. Some stores ring in defective merchandise using the normal product number, while others use a special product number.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch3

Page 86: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

If extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issuedIf a customer is returning a purchase on which extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, the procedure varies slightly depending on whether the reason for issuing the extra amount appears on the receipt. Examples A and C show the reason for the extra CT ‘Money’ and extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card (the customer had a Scratch and Save card for double CT ‘Money’), which means a transaction bonus was set up in the system. Examples B and D do not show a reason, which means a store bonus, such as a Double CT ‘Money’ day was set up.

Sample receipts with extra CT ‘Money’

Example A: Example B: REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 29-3040-0 MM COOLANT, 4L $ 9.99 (SCRATCH EXTRA CT MONEY 2X) SUBTOTAL $ 9.99 G.S.T. $ 0.70 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.80 TOTAL $ 11.49 CASH TEND. $ 11.49 CHANGE $ 0.00 BASE CT MONEY $ .20 SCRATCH 2X EXTRA CT MONEY $ .20 TOTAL CT MONEY $ .40

REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 29-3040-0 MM COOLANT, 4L $ 9.99 SUBTOTAL $ 9.99 G.S.T. $ 0.70 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.80 TOTAL $ 11.49 CASH TEND. $ 11.49 CHANGE $ 0.00 BASE CT MONEY $ .20 (1X)EXTRA CT MONEY $ .20 TOTAL CT MONEY $ .40

A reason code appears on this receipt. That means there was a transaction bonus. Extra CT ‘Money’ was issued because the customer had a Scratch & Save for double CT ‘Money’.

This receipt shows a store bonus. The customer received twice the normal rate of CT ‘Money’ but it does not show the reason.

3-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 87: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Sample receipts with extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card

Each store can customize the reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card. Common examples include Scratch, Senior’s, and Store PR. The Corporation can also download reasons to stores. As well, you may see the reason “Other” printed on the receipt with a reason written in by hand.

Each time you process a return where the receipt shows a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card, as in Example A, you must press Extra CT Money to display a window with reasons for issuing the extra amount. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

You need to select the appropriate reason. The next sections in this chapter describe the steps you need to follow in detail.

EXAMPLE C: EXAMPLE D: REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 29-3040-0 MM COOLANT, 4L $ 9.99 (SCRATCH EXTRA CT MONEY .30) SUBTOTAL $ 9.99 G.S.T. $ 0.70 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.80 TOTAL $ 11.49 CTA RTL #: 600627111122222 EXP. 1299 CARD READ APPROVAL #: 00 794239 CTA RTL TEND $ 11.49 BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ .30 SCRATCH CT MONEY-CARD $ .30 TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ .60

REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 29-3040-0 MM COOLANT, 4L $ 9.99 SUBTOTAL $ 9.99 G.S.T. $ 0.70 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.80 TOTAL $ 11.49 CTA TRL #: 600627111122222 EXP. 1299 CARD READ APPROVAL #: 00 794239 CTA RTL TEND $ 11.49 BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ .30 STORE BONUS CT MONEY-CARD $ .30 TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ .60 CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE $ 3.50

A reason code appears on this receipt. That means there was a transaction bonus. Extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued because the customer had a Scratch & Save for double CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

This receipt shows a store bonus. The customer received twice the normal rate of CT ‘Money’ On The Card, but it does not show the reason.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason on the return receipt by hand.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appear in this window.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 88: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

If the reason code on a receipt does not appear in the “Extra CTM Reason” windowYou may not be able to select the appropriate reason. For example, a customer purchases a product and receives extra CT ‘Money’ as part of a weekend promotion sponsored by the Corporation. If the customer returns the product two weeks later, the reason code for that corporate promotion will no longer appear. In that case, we recommend you select “Other” and write the reason on the return receipt by hand.

3-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 89: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - cash

3.1 Single tender returns - cash

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item and press Enter.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appear in this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 90: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter. Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money Days, type the number 3.

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts, but the base CT ‘Money’ amount is only calculated once.

6. Press Cash twice.

The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

7. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple, as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

8. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

3-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 91: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - cash

(If the customer does not return the full amount, this amount is deducted from the cash refund.)

The amount to return to the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

9. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

10. Remove the amount required, close the register drawers, tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a cash refund, where the customer returned the CT ‘Money’.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2001 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

-1X81-3182-4 POOL,PLAYTIME 15 $ -349.98

S U B T O T A L $ -349.98

TAX 1 $ -24.50

TAX 2 $ -28.00

T O T A L $ -402.48

CT MONEY RET $ 8.70

CTM NOT RETN’D $ 0.00

CASH REFUND $ 402.48

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 92: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a cash refund, where the customer did not return the CT ‘Money’.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 YONGE ST.TORONTO, ONTARIO

REG #3 04/14/2001 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

-1X81-3182-4 POOL,PLAYTIME 15 $ -349.98

S U B T O T A L $ -349.98

TAX 1 $ -24.50

TAX 2 $ -28.00

T O T A L $ -402.48

CT MONEY RET $ 0.00

CTM NOT RETN’D $ 8.70

CASH REFUND $ 393.78

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIREPLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES

GST#RT000000000

3-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 93: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - debit card

3.2 Single tender returns - debit card

Processing a refund for a debit card purchase is the same as processing a refund for a cash purchase.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item and press Enter.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appear in this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 94: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter. Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money Days, type the number 3.

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts, but the base CT ‘Money’ amount is only calculated once.

6. Press Cash twice.

The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

7. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple, as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

8. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

3-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 95: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - debit card

(If the customer does not return the full amount, this amount is deducted from the cash refund.)

The amount to return to the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

9. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

10. Remove the amount required, close the register drawers, tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 96: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

3.3 Single tender returns - credit card

Use these same steps to refund a purchase paid for in part or entirely using Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: Customers redeeming Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card on purchases cannot put the ‘Money’ back if they return an item. The system applies the full amount of the purchase (including any redemption amount) to the credit card balance. Once Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card is redeemed, only CTFS can update the balance.

Example: A customer makes a $20 purchase (after taxes) on which he redeems $5 Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card and charges $15 to his credit card account. If he later returns the item, his credit card account will be credited $20, which includes the Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not correct:a. Press Void.b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example C on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

3-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 97: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - credit card

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. If you need to enter the percentage or multiplier amount, enter the amount that appears beside XXXX CT MONEY-CARD, near the bottom of the receipt (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”) and press Enter.Examples: If 10% extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money On The Card Days, type the number 3.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appear in this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-13Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 98: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

If you need to enter the flat dollar amount, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt beside XXXX EXTRA CT MONEY (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”). See the following sample receipt:

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine them, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings or multiple “CT Money-Card” headings on receipts. However, the base CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card amounts are only calculated once.

6. Press Charge twice.

7. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.

8. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the following question appears:

Store Bonus CT Money - Card?

REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 -1X71-1010-0 SC13” RDSTAR TR $ -35.99 (SCRATCH EXTRA CT MONEY $ 5.00) SUBTOTAL $ -35.99 G.S.T. $ - 2.52 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ -38.51 CT M/C #:5446********0438 EXP: 0701 CUSTOMER NAME CARD READ APPROVAL #: 00 060321 CT M/C REFUND $ 38.51 BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ -0.96 SCRATCH CT MONEY-CARD $ -6.00 TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ -6.96 CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE$ 90.26

If extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt, not at the bottom. In this example, you would enter the number 500, not 600.The two amounts are different because the system calculates 20% more ‘Money’ On The Card.

3-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 99: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - credit card

a. Type the amount of store bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card for the product(s) being returned (indicated at the bottom of the receipt) and press Enter.

b. If there is none, press Enter.The following question appears:Product Bonus Money - Card?

c. Type the amount of product bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card indicated at the bottom of the receipt and press Enter.

d. If there is none, press Enter.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer signature.

9. If the message Insert Form appears, place the appropriate form face up into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the slip when printing stops.

10. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

11. Get the customer’s signature and file the credit slip.

12. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-15Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 100: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

3.4 Single tender returns - gift cards

When a customer returns merchandise purchased with a gift card, you should normally put the refund back onto the gift card. The refund does not have to be applied to the same gift card that was used in the purchase. It can be applied to any gift card. Putting a refund onto a gift card extends its expiry date two years. The customer receipt shows the new amount and expiry date of the gift card. This section describes the steps to follow.

However, depending on the policies at your store, you should issue a cash refund instead of putting the refund back onto the gift card in the following situations:

• the gift card has expired• the customer does not have the gift card when returning the product• the total amount on the gift card, after the refund, exceeds the value

that appears on the card. (Example: you can’t put a refund of $40.00 onto a $25 gift card)

• the system is offline.

If the customer does not have the receipt, issue a credit note instead. Go to “Single tender returns - credit notes” on page 3-20 for more information.

To put the refund back onto a gift card:

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item and press Enter.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

3-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 101: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - gift cards

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter. Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money Days, type the number 3.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-17Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 102: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts, but the base CT ‘Money’ amount is only calculated once.

6. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

7. Swipe the gift card.

or

Type the 19 numbers on the gift card and press Enter.

Note: In some stores, a supervisor’s password is required if the cashier enters the numbers on the gift card instead of swiping it.

The message Enter Refund Amount appears.

8. Press Gift Card again.

9. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple, as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

10. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

If customers do not return the full amount of CT ‘Money’, the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing will be deducted from the gift card balance. The register automatically connects to CTFS again to deduct the amount owing from the gift card balance.

The amount to be refunded onto the gift card is displayed and the CT ‘Money’ drawer opens.

11. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

3-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 103: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - gift cards

12. Close the register drawers, tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Here is an example of the customer receipt for a return that was refunded onto a gift card. For an example of a receipt for a split tender return involving a gift card, go to page 1-38. REG # 5 04/25/2002 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1

-1X52-8480-4 BREAKER, FED/PI $ -7.89

SUBTOTAL $ -7.89 G.S.T. $ -0.55 PROV SALES TAX $ -0.63 TOTAL $ -9.07 CT MONEY RET $ 0.00 CTM NOT RETN’D $ 0.05 GIFT CARD REFUND $ 9.07GIFT CARD REDEEMED $ 0.05GIFT CARD BALANCE: $ 9.02GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 24 APR.2004

The amount of CT ‘Money’ owingis $0.05.

It is deducted from the gift cardbalance and appears on the

receipt as a gift card redemption.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-19Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 104: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

3.5 Single tender returns - credit notes

In some circumstances, a credit note will be issued to a customer returning merchandise. For example, your store’s policy may be to offer a refund within 30 days of the purchase date. If a customer returns merchandise after 30 days, you could issue a credit note instead of a cash refund.

However, we recommend that you do not issue a credit note for a transaction where a CTC retail card or Options Mastercard was used and where extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued. In that case, it is easier just to refund the dollar amount to the credit card. Check with your supervisor for your store’s policies.

1. Press Cr Note Issue.

A “c” appears on the screen as confirmation that Cr Note Issue was pressed.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

3-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 105: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - credit notes

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type of CT ‘Money’ and press

Enter.One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter.Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT ‘Money’ Days, type the number 3.

6. Press Cash twice.

The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

7. If no extra CT money was issued, press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-21Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 106: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

or

If extra CT money was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5 above.)

or

If extra CT money was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a multiple as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount of extra CT ‘Money’ shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

8. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

(If the customer does not return all of the CT ‘Money’, this amount is deducted from the cash refund.)

9. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

3-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 107: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Single tender returns - deferred credit

3.6 Single tender returns - deferred credit

Handling a return for items that were purchased on deferred credit is the same as handling a normal charge refund except that you press the Deferred key before processing the charge.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. Press Deferred.

A “d” appears on the screen as confirmation that Deferred was pressed.

6. Press Charge twice.

7. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.

8. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the following question appears:

Store Bonus CT Money - Card?a. Type the amount of store bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card for the product(s) being returned (indicated at the bottom of the receipt) and press Enter.

b. If there is none, press Enter.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-23Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 108: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

The following question appears:Product Bonus Money - Card?

c. Type the amount of product bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card indicated at the bottom of the receipt and press Enter.

d. If there is none, press Enter.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer signature.

9. If the message Insert Form appears, place the appropriate form face up into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the slip when printing stops.

10. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

11. Get the customer’s signature and file the credit slip.

12. Give back the card and the customer’s copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

3-24 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 109: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

3.7 Split tender returns

The following examples show how to handle split tender refunds.

Cash and credit card returns

Note: To ensure proper issuance of CT ‘Money’ and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, process tenders in the same order as they appear on the receipt.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Examples A and C on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-25Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 110: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type of CT ‘Money’ or CT

‘Money’ On The Card press Enter.One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. If you need to enter the percentage or multiplier amount, enter the amount that appears beside XXXX CT MONEY-CARD, near the bottom of the receipt (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”) and press Enter.Examples: If 10% extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money On The Card Days, type the number 3. If you need to enter the flat dollar amount, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt beside XXXX EXTRA CT MONEY (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”). See the following sample receipt:

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

3-26 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 111: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine them, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings or multiple “CT Money-Card” headings on receipts. However, the base CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card amounts are only calculated once.

Caution: Perform the next two steps in the order that they appear on the receipt. For example, if the cash tender appears first, ring it in first for the refund. If the charge tender appears first on the receipt, however, ring it in before the cash.

6. Type the amount to be refunded in cash and press Cash.

7. Press Charge twice to refund the remainder as a credit on the customer’s credit card.

8. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.

REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 -1X71-1010-0 SC13” RDSTAR TR $ -35.99 (SCRATCH EXTRA CT MONEY $ 5.00) SUBTOTAL $ -35.99 G.S.T. $ - 2.52 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ -38.51 CT M/C #:5446********0438 EXP: 0701 CUSTOMER NAME CARD READ APPROVAL #: 00 060321 CT M/C REFUND $ 38.51 BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ -0.96 SCRATCH CT MONEY-CARD $ -6.00 TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ -6.96 CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE$ 90.26

If extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt, not at the bottom. In this example, you would enter the number 500, not 600.

The two amounts are different because the system calculates 20% more ‘Money’ On The Card.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-27Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 112: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

9. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the following question appears:

Store Bonus CT Money - Card?a. Type the amount of store bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card for the product(s) being returned (indicated at the bottom of the receipt) and press Enter.

b. If there is none, press Enter.The following question appears:Product Bonus Money - Card?

c. Type the amount of product bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card indicated at the bottom of the receipt and press Enter.

d. If there is none, press Enter.The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

10. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5 above.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (it shows a percentage or a multiple as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

11. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

(If the customer does not return the full amount, this amount is deducted from the last tender.)

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer signature.

12. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

13. Give the customer the cash refund. Get the customer’s signature on the credit slip and file it.

14. Give back the credit card and the customer copy of the receipt.

3-28 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 113: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

The register is ready for the next sale.

Cash and debit card returnsSince it is not currently possible to directly credit a customer’s bank account, always give cash refunds when a debit card was used for the purchase.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-29Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 114: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter. Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money Days, type the number 3.

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts, but the base CT ‘Money’ amount is only calculated once.

6. Press Cash twice.

The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

7. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5 above.)

or

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

3-30 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 115: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

8. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

(If the customer does not return all of the CT ‘Money’, this amount is deducted from the cash refund.)

9. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

10. Give the customer the cash refund.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Debit card and credit card returnsDebit card purchases are always refunded in cash.

Note: To ensure proper issuance of CT ‘Money’ and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, process split tender refunds in the same order as the tenders appear on the receipt.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Examples A and C on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-31Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 116: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’ or extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you don’t need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type of CT ‘Money’ or CT

‘Money’ On The Card press Enter.One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. If you need to enter the percentage or multiplier amount, enter the amount that appears beside XXXX CT MONEY-CARD, near the bottom of the receipt (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”) and press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

3-32 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 117: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

Examples: If 10% extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money On The Card Days, type the number 3. If you need to enter the flat dollar amount, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt beside XXXX EXTRA CT MONEY (where XXXX is the reason, such as “Scratch”). See the following sample receipt:

Note: As stated on promotional material, most promotions cannot be combined with others. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts. Cashiers will need to add these amounts together manually and enter the total at the above prompt.

Note: Perform the next two steps in the order that they appear on the receipt. For example, if the cash tender appears first, ring it in first for the refund. If the charge tender appears first on the receipt, however, ring it in before the cash.

6. Type the amount to be refunded in cash and press Cash.

7. Press Charge twice to refund the remainder as a credit on the customer’s credit card.

8. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:

REG # 5 12/02/2001 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1 -1X71-1010-0 SC13” RDSTAR TR $ -35.99 (SCRATCH EXTRA CT MONEY $ 5.00) SUBTOTAL $ -35.99 G.S.T. $ - 2.52 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ -38.51 CT M/C #:5446********0438 EXP: 0701 CUSTOMER NAME CARD READ APPROVAL #: 00 060321 CT M/C REFUND $ 38.51 BASE CT MONEY ON THE CARD $ -0.96 SCRATCH CT MONEY-CARD $ -6.00 TOTAL NEW CT MONEY ON CARD $ -6.96 CT MONEY ON THE CARD BALANCE$ 90.26

If extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, enter the amount that appears at the top of the receipt, not at the bottom. In this example, you would enter the number 500, not 600.

The two amounts are different because the system calculates 20% more ‘Money’ On The Card.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-33Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 118: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards, you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the remaining numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.

9. If the customer is using a CTC retail card or an Options MasterCard, the following question appears:

Store Bonus CT Money - Card?a. Type the amount of store bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The

Card for the product(s) being returned (indicated at the bottom of the receipt) and press Enter.

b. If there is none, press Enter.The following questions appears:Product Bonus Money - Card?

c. Type the amount of product bonus Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card indicated at the bottom of the receipt and press Enter.

d. If there is none, press Enter.The message Enter Extra CTM Of Return appears.

10. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5 above.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

11. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

The printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer signature.

12. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

13. Get the customer’s signature on the credit slip and file it.

3-34 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 119: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

14. Tear off the receipt and give it to the customer along with the cash refund.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Gift card and other tenders

Note: To ensure proper issuance of CT ‘Money’ and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, process tenders in the same order as they appear on the receipt.

Note: You cannot process gift card returns when the register is offline.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item and press Enter.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. If a reason for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ (such as Scratch, Senior’s, Store PR, Other) is printed on the receipt, as shown in Example A on page 1-2, do the following. (Otherwise skip to step 6.)a. Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

A window appears, listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

b. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’SReason codes 1 to 6 are always

store promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appearin this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

f there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will not appearin this window.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-35Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 120: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

A window may appear, listing the types of extra CT ‘Money’.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

If the “Type of Extra CTM” window does not appear, go to step 6.c. Type the number of the appropriate type and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

d. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiplier amount shown on the receipt and press Enter. Examples: For a flat $5.00 of extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 500. For 10% extra CT ‘Money’, type the number 10. For Triple CT Money Days, type the number 3.

Note: As stated on promotional material, most CT ‘Money’ promotions cannot be combined. If your store does allow customers to combine CT ‘Money’ promotions, there will be multiple “Extra CT Money” headings on receipts, but the base CT ‘Money’ amount is only calculated once.

6. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

7. Swipe the gift card.

or

Type the 19 numbers on the gift card and press Enter.

Note: In some stores, a supervisor’s password is required if the cashier enters the numbers on the gift card instead of swiping it.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM reason: ___

3-36 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 121: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Split tender returns

The message Enter Refund Amount appears.

8. Type the amount to be refunded onto the gift card and press Enter.

When the gift card is approved, the following message appears:

Enter additional tenders

9. Process the other tenders of the refund as usual.

The message Enter Extra CTM of Return appears.

10. If no extra CT ‘Money’ was issued, press Enter.

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt shows a reason, press Enter. (You already entered the reason code in step 5.)

or

If extra CT ‘Money’ was issued and the receipt does not show a reason (instead, it shows a percentage or a multiple, as in Example B on page 1-2), type the amount shown on the receipt beside the “Extra CT Money” heading and press Enter.

The message Enter CTM Retn’d appears.

11. Type the amount of CT ‘Money’ the customer is returning and press Enter.

If the customer does not return the full amount of CT ‘Money’, this amount is deducted from the last tender entered. If the last tender entered is a gift card, the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing will be deducted from the gift card balance. The register automatically connects to CTFS again to deduct the amount owing from the gift card balance.

Note: If the last tender entered is a gift card and the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing is more than the gift card balance, the message “Balance due” will appear at the bottom of the register screen and the customer will need to pay the balance using any tender. See the sample receipt on page 1-38.

The amount to return to the customer is displayed and the register drawers open.

12. When the system asks, insert the Return Product form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

13. Remove the amount required, close the register drawers, tear off the receipt and give it to the customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-37Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 122: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

The register is ready for the next sale.

Here is an example of the customer receipt for a split tender return involving cash and a gift card, where the gift card was the last tender entered and the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing is more than the gift card balance.

Note: This situation is not common. Usually the balance on the gift card is sufficient to pay for the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing.

REG # 5 04/25/2002 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1

-1X85-1020-4 BBQ,FOLDAWAY 18 $ -18.99

SUBTOTAL $ -18.99 G.S.T. $ -1.33 PROV SALES TAX $ -1.52 TOTAL $ -21.84 CASH REFUND $ 21.74 CT MONEY RET $ 0.00 CT MONEY NOT RETN’D $ 0.40GIFT CARD REFUND $ 0.10GIFT CARD REDEEMED $ 0.10GIFT CARD BALANCE: $ 0.00GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 24 APR.2004 CASH TEND. $ 0.30 CHANGE $ 0.00

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING AT CANADIAN TIRE.

PLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS OR INQUIRIES.

�The amount of CT ‘Money’ owing is $0.40.�The system deducts the amount owing from the gift card balance. The deduction appears on the receipt as a gift card redemption. In this example, $0.40 is owing, but there is only $0.10 on the gift card. �The customer must pay the difference between the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing and the gift card redemption. Here, the customer pays the $0.30 difference in cash.

�The total refund is $21.84.�$21.74 is refunded in cash.�$0.10 is refunded onto a gift card. It had a balance of $0.00 and now has $0.10 on it.

3-38 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 123: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Mixed transactions

3.8 Mixed transactions

This section describes how to handle a return and a purchase in one transaction. We describe how to process the refund first, but you can process the purchase first as well.

Note: We recommend that you process returns and sales separately, not as a mixed transaction.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in the first returned item as you would for a purchase.

The message Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void. b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Repeat these steps if the customer is returning other items.

5. Ring in any purchases.

6. If the purchase is more than the refund, process the remainder owing as usual according to the type of tender.

If the refund is more than the purchase, process the refund as usual.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 3-39Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 124: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Handling returns

3-40 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 125: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

4 Other situations

This chapter describes how to handle other situations that can occur:

• Swipe inquiry — when customers want to know how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card they have

• Taxes — modifying taxes, tax exempt purchases, surtaxes• Changing the CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card status of

items• Discounts — on an item, on the entire purchase, discount coupons• Cash advances• Receiving payments on account• Deposits• Cashing cheques• Suspending/Resuming a transaction• Castings• Service parts• Looking up a price• Special account number 1111111116• Stand-alone swipe inquiry• Environmental handling charges (EHC)• Accepting rain checks• Gift Card inquiry• Selling gift cards• Selling Auto Club cards• Gift Registry

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch4

Page 126: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.1 Looking up CTM-OTC for a customer - swipe inquiry

What is swipe inquiry?Customers will often ask you how much Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card they have. To find out for them, you can swipe their CTC retail card or Options MasterCard, either while you are processing a transaction for them or not. Swiping the card sends a request to CTFS, which sends the balance information back electronically.

If you are in the middle of a transaction when the customer asks you for the Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card balance, it appears on the screen. The following messages may appear at the register:

If you are not doing a transaction for the customer at the time (a stand-alone swipe inquiry) the Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card balance is printed on a receipt instead.

Note: The system doesn’t warn you if a card is “hot” when you do a swipe inquiry. This is only checked when the card is used to buy something.

Message Meaning

*Line Down* 08 CTM-Card Balance Unavail.

The line to CTFS is down.

CTMOTC Bal Unvl The CTM-OTC balance is not available from CTFS.

CT Money On The Card Balance Is $ xx.xxInsufficient CTM On The Card - Retry

Current balance is less than the redemption amount entered.

4-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 127: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Looking up CTM-OTC for a customer - swipe inquiry

How to perform a stand-alone swipe inquiryThis section describes how to do a stand-alone swipe inquiry, when the customer is not buying anything at the time of the request. Performing swipe inquiries as part of transactions is covered in Chapter 2 of this guide, as we describe how to perform charge transactions.

1. Press Inquiry.

2. Press Charge.

The message Enter Account # appears.

3. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

type the prefix 600627 that appears on the card before you type the embossed numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards, type 1299 and press Enter.)

A receipt is printed that looks something like this:CANADIAN TIRE #999

REG #3 04/14/01 08:55:09 TRANS #7OPERATOR #: 1

ACCOUNT NUMBER: 6006272221111111111CANADIAN TIRE MONEY ON THE CARD TOTAL BALANCE

$25.00

EARN CANADIAN TIRE MONEYON THE CARD WHEN YOU USE YOUR CARD

REDEEM IT ANYTIME FOR INSTANTSAVINGS AT CANADIAN TIRE

PLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS AND INQUIRIES

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 128: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.2 About taxes

Three situations can occur with regard to taxes:

• The customer is exempt from paying tax(es) and can provide the appropriate exemption numbers. (Tax Exempt) For example, some businesses are exempt from paying PST.

• You may have to modify the taxes on one or more items (Modify Tax) if they are incorrectly calculated because:- the register is offline; the system charges tax(es) on all items- the item is non-stock; the system charges tax(es) as the default- the item has been incorrectly set up in the system.

• You are required to collect a surtax when selling certain items, such as tires and batteries. (Surtax)

You may have to modify taxes for both purchases and returns. Modifying taxes can include removing taxes or adding taxes as required.

Tax exempt purchasesUse this procedure when a customer is exempt from paying tax(es) and can provide the appropriate exemption numbers.

1. Ring in the items purchased or returned.

2. Press Tax Exempt.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears:

3. If the sale is exempt from GST or HST, type the number 1 and press Enter. If the sale is exempt from provincial sales tax, type the number 2 and press Enter. (If you make a mistake, just type 1 or 2 again to reverse the exemption.)

4. Press Mgt to confirm the change.

TIP: When you modify taxes, a code such as “MOD TX 1” or “MOD TX 2” appears on the customer receipt.

Current Tax Exemption Flags

2. TAX 21. TAX 1

9. CT MONEYSelect Flag #: ___

4-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 129: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

About taxes

5. Type the tax exemption number when requested and press Enter. (Maximum 8 digits) If you do not have an exemption number, just press Enter.

6. Follow the normal steps for handling the purchase or return.

All items rung in will be exempt from the indicated taxes. The tax name and exemption number appear on the receipt to indicate that the specified tax has been exempted.

Modify taxes on an itemUse this procedure to modify the taxes on an item for which taxes are incorrectly calculated because:

• the register is offline, and so the system is charging tax(es) on all items

• the item is non-stock, and so the system charges tax(es) as the default• the item has been incorrectly set up in the system.

1. Press Modify Tax.

An “m” appears on the screen as confirmation that Modify Tax was pressed.

2. Ring in the item for which tax is not to be charged.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears:

3. If the item is exempt from GST or HST, type the number 1 and press Enter. If the item is exempt from provincial sales tax, type the number 2 and press Enter. (If you want to reverse the exemption, just type 1 or 2 again.) Press Mgt to confirm the change.

4. Follow the normal steps for handling a purchase or return.

The notation “MOD TX” appears on the receipt below the product number to show that the taxes were modified.

Current Tax Exemption Flags

2. TAX 21. TAX 1

9. CT MONEYSelect Flag #: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 130: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

SurtaxesUse this procedure to collect a surtax when selling certain items, such as tires and batteries.

1. Ring in the item for which the surtax applies.

2. Type the amount of the surtax and press Surtax.

3. Follow the appropriate steps for the type of tender being used.

4-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 131: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card exemptions

4.3 CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card exemptions

Sometimes no CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card is issued to customers for a particular item in a purchase, or for the entire purchase. For example, in some stores, staff do not receive CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card when using their staff discount.

Purchases exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The CardUse this procedure when no CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card will be issued on an entire purchase.

1. Ring in the items purchased or returned.

2. Press Tax Exempt.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears:

3. Type the number 9 and press Enter. (If you make a mistake, just type the number 9 again to reverse the exemption.)

4. Press Mgt to confirm the change.

5. When the system asks for the CT ‘Money’ exemption number, just press Enter.

6. Follow the normal steps for handling the purchase or return.

No CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card will be issued for the purchase.

Items exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The CardUse the following steps to prevent the system from calculating CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card for a particular item.

1. Press Modify Tax.

An “m” appears as confirmation that Modify Tax was pressed.

Current Tax Exemption Flags

2. TAX 21. TAX 1

9. CT MONEYSelect Flag #: ___

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 132: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

2. Ring in the item as usual.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears.

3. Type the number 9 and press Enter to make the item exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (If you make a mistake, just type 9 again to reverse this.) Press Mgt to confirm the change.

4. Follow the normal steps for handling a purchase or return.

Current Entry’s Tax Flags

2. TAX 21. TAX 1

9. CT MONEYSelect Flag #: ___

4-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 133: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

About discounts

4.4 About discounts

Discounts can be either a percentage off or a dollar amount off the purchase price.

Discounts can apply to:

• the whole purchase or return (transaction discount)• a specific item (item discount)

Transaction discounts vs. item discountsTransaction discounts can only be applied to product numbers or SKU numbers that are set up in the system to be discountable. Item discounts can be applied to any item, regardless of whether it has a product or SKU number.

For that reason, transaction discounts cannot be applied to items such as Shop Charges that have no product or SKU number. Only an item discount can be applied to these items.

Discountable vs. non-discountable itemsEach store controls which items are discountable by flagging them as discountable or non-discountable in the system.

Discounting taxes and CT ‘Money’When you enter a discount, the taxes as well as CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card are reduced automatically. If necessary, you can use the Modify Tax key to cause taxes, CT ‘Money’, and CT ‘Money’ On The Card to be calculated based on the full purchase price rather than the discounted price.

Transaction discountTransaction discounts can only be applied to discountable items with product numbers or SKU numbers. If non-discountable items have been rung in when you press Trans Discount, the discount is calculated on the total of the discountable items only.

Example: A customer buys 10 items, 5 of which are set up in the system as discountable. The cashier does not need to know which items are discountable. Simply ring in the 10 items in any order and press Trans Discount. The system automatically processes the discounts appropriately.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 134: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

1. Ring in all items.

2. Press Trans Discount.

A window appears listing the names of all the discounts.

3. Type the number to the left of the appropriate discount name and press Enter.

The Discount Types window may appear where you can select the discount type.

Note: If the discount you select has been pre-set on the server, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up discounts on the server so that you do not need to select the discount type and amount. You only need to select the discount name and the cash register does the rest.

If the Discount Types window does not appear, go to step 6.

4. For a % discount, type the number 1 and press Enter. For a $ discount, type the number 2 and press Enter. (To exit this question without selecting a discount, just press Exit.)

5. Type the percentage or dollar amount of the discount and press Enter.

6. Follow the appropriate steps to accept tender or complete the refund.

7. When prompted, insert the Customer Discount form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

Note: Normally, taxes and CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card are discounted too, but in some cases, taxes must be paid or CTM/CTM-OTC issued based on the full purchase price rather than the discounted price. In those cases, you will need to adjust the taxes or CTM/CTM-OTC for each item as described in “Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on discounted price)” on page 4-11.

4-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 135: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

About discounts

Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on discounted price)

PURCHASESItem discounts are applied to one item only. If the item rung in is not discountable, the prompt Invalid For Last Item appears.

Example: A customer buys 10 items, 5 of which are eligible for an item discount. The cashier needs to know which items are discountable and ring them in first. Ring in the 5 discountable items and press Item Discount after each item. Then ring in the items that are not discountable.

1. Ring in an item to be discounted.

2. Press Item Discount.

A window appears listing the names of all the discounts.

3. Type the number to the left of the appropriate discount name and press Enter.

The Discount Types window may appear where you can select the discount type.

Note: If the discount you select has been pre-set on the server, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up discounts on the server so that you do not need to select the discount type and amount. You only need to select the discount name and the cash register does the rest.

If the Discount Types window does not appear, go to step 6.

4. For a % discount, type the number 1 and press Enter. For a $ discount, type the number 2 and press Enter. (To exit this question without selecting a discount, just press Exit.)

5. Type the percentage or dollar amount of the discount and press Enter.

Note: If the item you want to discount has other items linked to it, the discount will only apply to the primary item, not to the linked items.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 if the customer is purchasing other products to which an item discount applies.

7. Ring in other items, if any.

8. Follow the appropriate steps to accept tender.

9. When prompted, insert the Item Discount form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 136: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

Note: Normally, taxes and CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card are discounted too, but in some cases, taxes must be paid or CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card issued based on the full purchase price rather than the discounted price. In those cases, you will need to adjust the taxes or CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card for each item as described in “Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on undiscounted price)” on page 4-13.

RETURNS1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Scan or key in the product number of the item to be returned.

The prompt Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void.b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Press Item Discount.

A window appears listing the names of all the discounts.

5. Type the number to the left of the appropriate discount name and press Enter.

The Discount Types window may appear where you can select the discount type.

Note: If the discount you select has been pre-set on the server, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up discounts on the server so that you do not need to select the discount type and amount. You only need to select the discount name and the cash register does the rest.

If the Discount Types window does not appear, go to step 8.

6. For a % discount, type the number 1 and press Enter. For a $ discount, type the number 2 and press Enter. (To exit this question without selecting a discount, just press Exit.)

7. Type the percentage or dollar amount of the discount and press Enter.

8. Follow the appropriate steps to complete the refund.

4-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 137: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

About discounts

Item discount (taxes and/or CT Money/CT ‘Money’ On The Card on undiscounted price)

PURCHASESNormally, taxes and CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card are calculated on the discounted price, but in some cases, taxes must be paid or CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card issued based on the full purchase price rather than on the discounted price.

1. Ring in all items to be discounted.

2. Press Modify Tax.

An “m” appears on the screen as confirmation that Modify Tax was pressed.

3. Press Item Discount.

A window appears listing the names of all the discounts.

4. Type the number to the left of the appropriate discount name and press Enter.

The Discount Types window may appear where you can select the discount type.

Note: If the discount you select has been pre-set on the server, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up discounts on the server so that you do not need to select the discount type and amount. You only need to select the discount name and the cash register does the rest.

If the Discount Types window does not appear, go to step 7.

5. For a % discount, type the number 1 and press Enter. For a $ discount, type the number 2 and press Enter. (To exit this question without selecting a discount, just press Exit.)

6. Type the percentage or dollar amount of the discount and press Enter.

Note: If the item you want to discount has other items linked to it, the discount will only apply to the primary item, not to the linked items.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-13Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 138: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

7. Type one or more of the following numbers as required and press Enter to calculate the applicable tax(es) and CT ‘Money’ on the undiscounted price:

• 1 to change the TAX 1 flag from TAXABLE to NON-TXBL• 2 to change the TAX 2 flag from TAXABLE to NON-TXBL• 9 to change the CT money flag from CT MONEY to NON CT

MONEY

8. Press Mgt to confirm the change.

If you want to reverse your selection, just type the same number again and press Enter.

9. Ring in other items, if any.

10. Follow the appropriate steps to accept tender.

11. When prompted, insert the Item Discount form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

RETURNS1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Scan or key in the product number of the item to be returned.

The prompt Press <Mgt> If Price Ok, <Void> To Change appears.

3. If the unit price displayed is correct, press Mgt.

or

If the unit price is not what the customer paid:a. Press Void.b. Type the correct unit price and press Enter.

4. Press Modify Tax.

An “m” appears on the screen as confirmation that Modify Tax was pressed.

5. Press Item Discount.

A window appears listing the names of all the discounts.

Note: If the item you want to discount has other items linked to it, the discount will only apply to the primary item, not to the linked items.

6. Type the number to the left of the appropriate discount name and press Enter.

4-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 139: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

About discounts

The Discount Types window may appear where you can select the discount type.

Note: If the discount you select has been pre-set on the server, this window will not appear. The computer operator can set up discounts on the server so that you do not need to select the discount type and amount. You only need to select the discount name and the cash register does the rest.

If the Discount Types window does not appear, go to step 9.

7. For a % discount, type the number 1 and press Enter. For a $ discount, type the number 2 and press Enter. (To exit this question without selecting a discount, just press Exit.)

8. Type the percentage or dollar amount of the discount and press Enter.

A window with the product’s current tax flags appears.

9. Type one or more of the following numbers as required and press Enter to calculate the applicable tax(es) and CT ‘Money’ on the undiscounted price:

• 1 to change the TAX 1 flag from TAXABLE to NON-TXBL.• 2 to change the TAX 2 flag from TAXABLE to NON-TXBL.• 9 to change the CT money flag from CT MONEY to NON CT

MONEY.

If you want to reverse your selection, just type the same number again and press Enter.

10. Press Mgt to confirm the change.

11. Ring in other items, if any.

12. Follow the appropriate steps to complete the refund.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-15Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 140: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.5 Extra or reduced CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card

Use the following procedures if you want to increase or decrease the CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card given out. For example, some stores offer extra CT ‘Money’ and extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card on specific items, or to certain customers such as seniors.

PurchasesTo INCREASE CT Money or CT ‘Money’ On The Card manually at the register:

1. Ring in the item(s) purchased.

2. Press Extra CT Money.

A window appears listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

3. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

A window may appear where you can select the type of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, you cannot increase the amount manually at the register. This window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’S

Reason codes 1 to 6 are alwaysstore promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will notappear in this window.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM type: ___

4-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 141: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Extra or reduced CT ‘Money’/CT ‘Money’ On The Card

CT ‘Money’ On The Card. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

4. Type the number of the appropriate type of CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:

Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

5. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiple CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card amount and press Enter.

6. Follow the appropriate steps to accept tender.

7. If the system asks, insert the Extra CT Money form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

or

The printer prints an extra copy of the receipt, which you should keep with your paperwork. Depending on the policy in place at your store, you may need a supervisor’s signature on the extra receipt.

To DECREASE CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card manually at the register:

1. Ring in the items purchased.

2. Press Mdse Return.

3. Press Extra CT Money.

A window appears listing reasons for issuing extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. (It may show different reasons at your store.)

4. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

Extra CTM Reason 2. SCRATCH3. STORE PR4. OTHER

Select extra CTM reason: ___

5.6.7. CORP PR8. CTFS PR

1. SENIOR’S

Reason codes 1 to 6 are alwaysstore promotions.

Reason codes 7 and 8 are alwayscorporate promotions.

If the reason on the receipt does not appear in this window, you should select “Other” and write the reason by hand on the return receipt.

If there are no corporate promotions in effect, reason codes 7 and 8 will notappear in this window.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-17Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 142: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

A window may appear where you can select the type of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

Note: If the reason code you select has been pre-set, you cannot decrease the amount manually at the register. This window will not appear. The computer operator can set up reason codes on the server so that you do not need to select the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card. You only need to select a reason code, and the cash register does the rest.

5. Type the number of the appropriate type of CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card and press Enter.

One of the following prompts appears:

Enter Extra CTM $ Amt:Enter Extra CTM Percentage:Enter Extra CTM Multiplier:

6. Type the dollar, percentage, or multiple CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card amount and press Enter.

7. Follow the appropriate steps to accept tender.

8. If the system asks, insert the Extra CT Money form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

or

The printer prints an extra copy of the receipt, which you should keep with your paperwork. Depending on the policy in place at your store, you may need a supervisor’s signature on the extra receipt.

ReturnsIf a customer is returning a purchase on which extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued, the procedure varies slightly depending on whether the reason for issuing the extra amount appears on the receipt. For detailed instructions, go to Chapter 3, Handling returns.

Type of Extra CTM 1. Dollar ($)2. Percentage (%)3. Multiple (X)

Select extra CTM type: ___

4-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 143: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Suspend/resume transactions

4.6 Suspend/resume transactions

If you have rung in items purchased or returned but cannot complete the transaction immediately, you can suspend the transaction and resume it later.

This feature is useful if customers forget their wallet in the car, or if you want to ring in Service Centre work orders in advance to speed up customer payments.

Note: If you suspend a transaction that includes a gift card sale, the register automatically deletes the gift card from the transaction. When you resume the transaction, you must ring in the gift card again. The register will remind you.

Suspended transactions do not affect float totals, but they do affect inventory totals during the day (until the End of Day job runs). You can suspend transactions beyond the current day, if necessary, but it is best to void them at the end of the shift to ensure correct inventory totals. A suspended transaction can be resumed at any register, as long as the reference number is available.

1. Ring in the items purchased.

2. Press Suspend.

A reference number is printed on the cash register receipt. Keep the receipt handy. You will need the reference number to resume the transaction.

The register is now ready to process other customers. When you are ready to complete the transaction, go on to step 3.

3. Press Resume.

The prompt Enter Suspended Transaction Ref # appears.

4. Type the reference number printed on the receipt and press Enter.

The details of the suspended transaction are displayed in a window.

5. If this is the correct transaction, press Mgt. You can continue with the transaction as if it had never been suspended, or void it.

If this is not the correct transaction, press Enter to cancel the resume.

Note: If the suspended transaction included the sale of a gift card, the register will remind you to ring in the gift card again.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-19Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 144: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a sale that was suspended.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 Yonge St.

Toronto, Ontario

REG #3 04/14/2002 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

66-9970-0 $10 GIFT CARD $ 10.00

GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 13 APR. 2004

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

SUSPEND TOTAL $ 89.99

REFERENCE # : 4905

* TRANS’N SUSPENDED *

Thank you for shopping at Canadian TirePlease Retain for Returns or Inquiries

GST#RT000000000

4-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 145: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Suspend/resume transactions

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt for a sale that was resumed.

Note: If you suspend a transaction that includes the sale of a gift card, the gift card appears on the receipt of the suspended transaction (see previous page). However, when you resume the transaction, if you do not ring in the gift card again, it does not appear on the receipt of the resumed transaction (see above).

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 Yonge St.

Toronto, Ontario

REG #3 04/14/2002 09:00:02 TRANS #17

OPERATOR #: 1

* TRANS’N RESUMED *REFERENCE #: 4905

SUSPENDED BY: 1 ON REG# 3TRANSACTION #: 7 AT: 04/14 08:55:09

88-1224-4 PIC BENCH $ 79.99

RESUME TOTAL $ 79.99

SUBTOTAL $ 79.99

TAX 1 $ 5.60

TAX 2 $ 6.40

T O T A L $ 91.99

CASH TEND $ 100.00

CHANGE $ 8.01

BASE CT MONEY $ 2.00

Thank you for shopping at Canadian TirePlease Retain for Returns or Inquiries

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-21Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 146: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.7 Cash advances

Customers with CTC retail credit cards can obtain cash advances on their cards. This cannot be combined with any other transaction.

Customers with Options MasterCard cards cannot get cash advances at Canadian Tire stores but can get them at automated bank machines and at banks that issue MasterCard.

1. Enter the amount of the cash advance and press Cash Advance.

2. If you see the prompt Enter Your Operator Number, your supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password. This prompt does not appear in all stores.

3. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the embossed numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

4. If the card is approved, the system automatically continues with the next step. If it is not approved or is approved on condition, see “Credit card approvals” on page 7-3 for instructions.

5. Press Cash twice.

6. If the prompt Insert Form appears, place the cash advance form face up into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the slip when printing stops.

or

If you swiped the card, the printer prints two receipts, the customer copy and store copy, and cuts them automatically. The second receipt has a space for the customer’s signature and the driver’s licence number.

7. Get the customer’s signature and file the store copy of the receipt.

8. Remove the amount required and close the register drawers.

9. Give back the credit card and the customer’s copy of the receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

4-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 147: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Payment on account

4.8 Payment on account

Customers can make payments on their CTC and Options MasterCard accounts at any store. This cannot be combined with any other transaction.

1. Enter the amount of the payment and press Payment.

2. Swipe the card.

or

Enter the card information manually as follows:a. Type the account number and press Enter. (For CTC retail cards,

you have to type the prefix 600627 before typing the embossed numbers - 19 digits in all.)

b. Type the expiry date (in the format MMYY) and press Enter. (If there is no expiry date on the card, type 1299 and press Enter.)

3. Press the orange tender key twice for the type of tender the customer is paying with, such as Cash, Cheque, Travelers Cheque.

4. Tear off the customer receipt.

5. Tear off the second receipt and fill in the amount paid. (The customer is not required to sign the receipt when making a payment.)

6. File the second receipt.

7. Give the customer the credit card and the customer receipt.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Customer does not have cardIf customers don’t have their credit card with them, use special account number 1111111116.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-23Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 148: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.9 Payment on house account

Payments on house accounts cannot be combined with any other transaction.

1. Enter the amount of the payment and press Payment.

2. Press Mgt to display a list of card types.

3. Type the number 5 and press Enter to select “House”.

4. Type the house account number and press Enter. (House account numbers can be up to 5 digits long.)

5. Type the expiry date of the house account card. If you do not have an expiry date, just type four zeros.

6. Press the orange tender key twice for the type of tender the customer is paying with, such as Cash, Cheque, Traveler’s Cheque.

7. When the prompt Insert Form - House appears, place the payment form face up into the printer at the left side of the register and press Mgt. Remove the slip when printing stops.

8. Get the customer’s signature, fill in the phone number and amount paid, and then file the store copy of the receipt.

9. Give a copy of the receipt to the customer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

4-24 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 149: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Cashing cheques

4.10 Cashing cheques

The policy for cashing cheques varies among stores. If you are not sure of the policies at your store, ask your supervisor.

1. Type the non-inventory SKU number used for cashing cheques at your store and press Non-inv SKU.

The non-inventory SKU number is displayed with an amount of zero.

2. Type the amount of the cheque and press Cheque.

3. When the prompt Enter Account Number appears, press Mgt . The list of charge account types appears.

4. Type 99 and press Enter to select “No Card”.

5. Give the cash to the customer.

6. Insert the cheque face down into the printer and press Mgt.

7. Remove the cheque when printing stops and file it in the drawer.

The register is ready for the next sale.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-25Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 150: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.11 Deposits

Customers may be required to pay a deposit at times, such as when they order an item that is not in stock. When the item comes in, you need to process the purchase minus the deposit.

Taking the deposit1. Enter the amount of the deposit and press Deposit.

2. Complete the transaction according to the type of tender the customer is paying with (cash, cheque, charge).

3. Insert the deposit form face up into the printer.

4. Give the customer the receipt for the deposit.

Refunding a deposit1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Type the amount of the deposit and press Deposit.

3. Complete the transaction according to the type of tender the customer used (cash, cheque, charge).

Handling a purchase when the customer has paid a depositTo ensure that the cash register appies taxes and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On the Card or CT ‘Money’ properly, refund the deposit first, and then handle the purchase as a separate transaction.

1. Refund the deposit using the steps above.

2. Ring in the merchandise as if no deposit had been made.

4-26 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 151: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Casting

4.12 Casting

When purchasing items like batteries, customers can receive a credit for bringing in the old battery for safe disposal or reuse.

Depending on the store, a manager or supervisor might have to enter his or her operator number and password.

1. Ring in items purchased, if any.

2. Type the amount to be credited for the casting and press Casting.

A casting credit is shown as a negative amount on the screen and the receipt.

3. Complete the transaction as usual.

4. Insert the appropriate form face up into the printer and press Mgt. Remove the slip when printing stops.

Tip: To enter a casting on its own rather than as part of a purchase, type the amount to be credited and press Casting. Then complete the transaction as you would any return.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-27Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 152: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.13 Service Centre parts and invoices

PartsSome stores like to track automotive parts sold through the Service Centre. If that is the case at your store, use this procedure when ringing in Service Centre parts. Instead of pressing Enter after ringing in a part, press Service Parts.

1. Type the product number of the part.

2. Press Service Parts instead of Enter.

3. Complete the transaction as usual

InvoicesUse the following procedure to ring in Service Centre invoices.

1. Type the certification number and press Service Parts.

You must type the certification number even if there are no parts on the invoice.

The following prompt appears:

Enter Unit Price: $

2. Type the parts subtotal and press Enter. (If there are no parts, type a zero instead.)

3. Type the labour subtotal and press Shop Labour.

4. Complete the transaction as usual.

4-28 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 153: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Looking up a price

a le”

de

4.14 Looking up a price

You can use the register to look up the price, description and tax status of an item without having to ring in a sale.

You can only do this for items with CTC product numbers - not for UPC codes or SKU numbers.

1. Type 6 digits of the Canadian Tire product number of the item to look up. The check digit, if any, is not required.

2. Press Inquiry.

The following window appears. It shows the results of an inquiry on product number 171704.

Note: The CT Money flag indicates that CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card can both be earned on a product.

3. To display the item with the next higher product number, press Next. Likewise, to display the previous item, press Previous.

4. If you want to ring in the item you inquired on, type the quantity and press Mgt.

If you do not want to ring in the item, press Exit.

Note: The O/H (On Hand) field shows the number sold since the last time the field was reset. It does not show the true on-hand quantity. This information is tracked on the AS/400.

Product Inquiry

Enter Product #, <Next> - Next Product<Prev> - Previous Product, Qty+<Mgt> To

Sell The Product Or <Exit> To Exit:

>_

17-1704-2

PER1A OIL $ 2.59 ON SALE

DEPT: 1 O/H: -31 CT Money

G.S.T. Prov Sales Tax

If the product issale item, “on sawill appear besithe price.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-29Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 154: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.15 Ringing in shop labour

Use the following procedure to ring in the labour portion of a work order.

1. Type the amount and press Shop Labour.

2. Complete the transaction for the type of tender.

Note: Shop labour does not earn CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card.

4.16 Ringing in store labour

Use the following procedure to ring in store labour for things like bike assembly charges.

1. Type the non-inventory SKU number used for store labour at your store and press Non-inv SKU.

2. Type the amount of the store labour and press Enter.

3. Complete the transaction for the type of tender.

4.17 Environmental handling charge (EHC)

In July of 1997 some provinces introduced a law requiring that vendors charge an environmental handling charge (EHC) on certain products, to pay for recycling. For example, some provinces have placed an EHC on oil or oil filters.

The EHC is not a tax, but a fee that customers are charged on certain items. The fee appears automatically at the register and on the customer’s receipt.

The EHC will be set up using linked products. For more information on linking, please see “Items with links” on page 1-22.

TIP:If you don’t know all of the digits of an item, you can type the first two digits of the product number and enter four zeros (example: 170000). Then you can use the Previous and Next keys to page through the products until you find the one you want.

4-30 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 155: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Environmental handling charge (EHC)

Here is an example of a typical cash register receipt showing ECO fees.

CANADIAN TIRE #9992180 Yonge St.

Toronto, Ontario

REG #3 04/14/2001 08:55:09 TRANS #7

OPERATOR #: 1

28-7313-0 MM SUPREME 10W30 $ 1.49

98-0758-6 ECO FEE $ 0.10 $ .10

S U B T O T A L $ 1.59

TAX 1 $ .11

TAX 2 $ .13

T O T A L $ 1.83

CASH TEND $ 1.83

CHANGE $ .00

Thank you for shopping at Canadian TirePlease Retain for Returns or Inquiries

GST#RT000000000

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-31Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 156: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.18 Accepting rain checks

1. Ring in the items.

2. Press Price Override.

The prompt Price Override: Press <Exit> to exit, <Prev>, <Next> to locate entry or <Void> to override displayed entry appears on the screen.

3. If the item whose price you want to override was not the last item entered, locate the item using the Previous and Next keys. When the correct item is highlighted, press Void.

or

If the item whose price you want to override was the last item entered, press Void.

The prompt Enter Override Amt appears.

4. Type the correct price and press Enter.

The line you selected is voided on the screen, and a new line that shows the new price for the item is added.

A window appears listing reasons for overriding the price.

5. Type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

6. Continue with the transaction as usual.

7. If the system asks, insert the Price Override form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

or

If the system asks, press Mgt to print a validation slip, which you should keep with your paperwork.

Depending on the policy in place at your store, you may need a supervisor’s signature on the slip print or validation slip.

4-32 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 157: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Looking up a gift card balance for a customer - gift card inquiry

4.19 Looking up a gift card balance for a customer - gift card inquiry

What is gift card inquiry?Customers will often ask you how much cash is left on their gift cards. To find out for them, you can swipe their gift card, while you are processing a transaction for them or not. Swiping the gift card sends a request to CTFS, which sends the balance information back electronically.

If you are in the middle of a transaction when the customer asks you for the gift card balance, it appears on the screen. The following messages may appear at the register:

If you are not doing a transaction for the customer at the time (a stand-alone inquiry) the gift card balance is printed on a receipt instead.

How to perform a stand-alone gift card inquiryThis section describes how to do a stand-alone swipe inquiry when the customer is not buying anything at the time of the request. Performing swipe inquiries as part of transactions is covered in Chapter 2 of this guide.

1. Press Inquiry.

2. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

3. Swipe the gift card.

or

Type all 19 digits on the gift card manually and press Enter.

Message Meaning

*Line Down* 08 Balance Unavailable

The line to CTFS is down.

Gift Card Balance Unavailable The gift card balance is not available from CTFS.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-33Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 158: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

A receipt is printed that looks something like this:CANADIAN TIRE #999

REG #3 04/14/01 08:55:09 TRANS #7OPERATOR #: 1

ACCOUNT NUMBER: 6006272221111111111GIFT CARD BALANCE

$25.00GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 13 SEPT. 2004

PLEASE RETAIN FOR RETURNS AND INQUIRIES

4-34 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 159: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Selling gift cards

4.20 Selling gift cards

Customers can purchase gift cards in the following denominations: $10, $25, $50, and $100. They can also purchase loadable gift cards, on which they can load any amount they choose, from a minimum of $5 to a maximum of $1000. For more information on reloadable gift cards, go to Section 4.21, “Selling loadable gift cards”, on page 4-37.

Once you activate a gift card, customers can use it immediately. Gift cards expire two years from the date they are purchased. However, whenever a customer has money refunded or reloaded onto a gift card, the expiry date automatically changes to two years from the transaction date.

Taxes, CT ‘Money’, and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card do not apply when customers purchase a gift card. They apply only when they use the gift card to pay for a purchase.

Gift card sales are final. Customers cannot return gift cards for a refund.

When the register is offline, cashiers cannot suspend a transaction involving a gift card sale, do an inquiry on a gift card balance, sell gift cards, or refund or reload money back onto gift cards.

1. Ring in the gift card and tell the customer the balance due.

The message Swipe Gift Card appears.

2. Swipe the gift card to activate it.

If the gift card doesn’t swipe, you cannot complete the transaction. Get another gift card and repeat these steps.

If the gift card swipes successfully, a message appears with the value of the gift card.

3. Verify that the value on the register screen matches the value printed on the gift card.

If the values do not match, do not complete the transaction. Get another gift card and repeat these steps. Set the defective gift card aside and turn it in with your paperwork.

4. Complete the transaction for the type of tender used to pay for the gift card.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-35Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 160: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

Here is an example of a customer receipt for the purchase of a $50 and a $100 gift card.

REG # 5 07/02/2002 16:51:32 TRANS#22OPERATOR #: 1

66-9972-6 $50 GIFT CARD $ 50.00 GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 1 JUL. 200466-9973-4 $100 GIFT CARD $ 100.00 GIFT CARD EXPIRES: 1 JUL. 2004 SUBTOTAL $ 150.00 G.S.T. $ 0.00 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ 150.00 CASH TEND $ 150.00 CHANGE $ 0.00

4-36 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 161: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Selling loadable gift cards

4.21 Selling loadable gift cards

Selling loadable gift cards is similar to selling standard gift cards. Loadable gift cards can have any value the customer wants, from a minimum of $5 to a maximum of $1000.

The same rules apply to loadable gift cards:

• Once you activate them, customers can use them immediately• They expire two years from the date they are purchased. However,

whenever a customer has money reloaded onto a gift card, the expiry date automatically changes to two years from the transaction date.

• Taxes, CT ‘Money’, and Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card do not apply when customers purchase a loadable gift card. They apply only when they use it to pay for a purchase.

• Loadable gift card sales are final. Customers cannot return them for a refund.

• When the register is offline, cashiers cannot suspend a transaction involving a gift card sale, do an inquiry on a gift card balance, sell gift cards, or refund or reload money back onto gift cards.

1. Ring in the gift card and tell the customer the balance due.

The message Swipe gift card appears.

2. Swipe the gift card to activate it.

If the gift card doesn’t swipe, you cannot key it in and complete the transaction. Get another loadable gift card and repeat these steps. Set the faulty gift card aside and turn it in with your paperwork.

The message Enter gift card amount appears.

3. Type the amount of the gift card and press Enter.The minimum loadable amount is $5.00 and the maximum is $9999.99.

Note: If the customer requests an amount of $1000.00 or more, your supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password before you can complete the transaction.

4. Verify that the value on the register screen matches the value requested by the customer.

If the values do not match, do not complete the transaction. Press Item Correct and ring the gift card in again.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-37Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 162: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

5. Complete the transaction for the type of tender used to pay for the gift card.

Here is an example of a customer receipt for the purchase of a $40 loadable gift card.

REG # 5 07/02/2003 16:51:32 TRANS#22OPERATOR #: 1

66-9990-2 LOADABLE CARD $ 40.00 GIFT CARD EXPIRES: JULY 1 2005 SUBTOTAL $ 40.00 G.S.T. $ 0.00 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ 40.00 CASH TEND $ 40.00 CHANGE $ 0.00 BASE CT MONEY $ 0.00 TOTAL CT MONEY $ 0.00

4-38 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 163: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Reloading gift cards

4.22 Reloading gift cards

Customers can ask to reload money onto their own activated loadable gift card. They can reload their card as many times as they want, before it expires, even if the balance on the card is $0.00.

The maximum amount that can be reloaded without a manager’s authorization is $1000. The minimum amount that can be reloaded is $5. You cannot reload money onto an expired card. After a reload, the expiry date on the card becomes two years from the date of the reload.

1. Press Gift Card.

The message Swipe Gift Card or Enter Card Number appears.

2. Ring in the gift card and press Enter.

The message Enter Redemption Amount appears.

3. Skip this message by pressing Mgt.

The message Enter Reload Amount appears.

4. Type the amount that the customer wants to reload and press Enter.

Note: If the customer wants to reload $1000.00 or more, your supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password before you can complete the transaction.

The message Call in Progress... Please Wait appears.

5. If the reload is approved, complete the transaction as usual depending on the type of tender used.

The register is ready for the next sale.

Once a reload is processed, a new 2-year expiry date is assigned to the gift card.

Here is an example of the customer receipt for a transaction that reloaded $100 onto an existing gift card that already had a $10 balance. REG # 5 07/02/2003 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1

GIFT CARD RELOAD $ 100.00GIFT CARD BALANCE: $110.00GIFT CARD EXPIRES: JULY 1, 2005

SUBTOTAL $ 100.00 G.S.T. $ 0.00 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ 100.00 CASH TEND $ 100.00 BASE CT MONEY $ 0.00 TOTAL CT MONEY $ 0.00

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-39Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 164: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4.23 Voiding a gift card sale

When customers purchase gift cards, the sale is final. However, it is possible to void the transaction on the same day the gift card is purchased. You cannot void the transaction after that. For more information about voiding prior sales, go to “Void prior transaction” on page 5-3.

Note: Before you void a gift card sale, it is important for a manager to do a swipe inquiry to verify that the gift card has not been used. For more information about gift card swipe inquiry, go to “Looking up a gift card balance for a customer - gift card inquiry” on page 4-33.

When you void a gift card sale, the system will require you to swipe the gift card in order to deactivate it. Once the gift card is deactivated, you can put it back on the shelf. You cannot void a gift card transaction if the register is offline.

4-40 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 165: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Selling Auto Club cards

4.24 Selling Auto Club cards

The Auto Club card program provides a simple and secure way to sell Auto Club membership plans in store. There are two kinds of Auto Club card, gold and silver.

Auto Club card rules• Auto Club card sales are final. Customers cannot return Auto Club

cards for a refund.• Auto Club cards on the shelf are not active and cannot be used. They

are activated by cashiers as they are paid for. Once cards are purchased, customers still need to enroll in the Auto Club program by phone or online.

• Auto Club cards become invalid after 200 days (just over six months) from the purchase date. If customers do not enroll in the Auto Club within 200 days, they forfeit the purchase value of the card.

• PST does not apply to Auto Club card purchases. Only GST, QST and HST apply.

• Customers do not receive Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card or CT ‘Money’ when they purchase Auto Club cards.

• Customers can use Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card or CT ‘Money’ to purchase Auto Club cards.

• You cannot do a swipe inquiry on Auto Club cards. If customers have questions about the card, tell them to call the Auto Club. The phone number appears on the card itself.

• When the register is offline (when the lines are down to CTFS), you cannot process, suspend or resume an Auto Club card transaction.

1. Ring in the Auto Club card and tell the customer the balance due.

The message Swipe Auto Club card appears.

2. Swipe the Auto Club card to activate it.

If the card doesn’t swipe, you cannot complete the transaction. Get another card and repeat these steps.

If the card swipes successfully, a message appears with the value of the Auto Club card.

3. Verify that the value on the register screen matches the value printed on the Auto Club card packaging.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-41Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 166: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

If the values do not match, do not complete the transaction. Get another card and repeat these steps. Set the defective gift card aside and turn it in with your paperwork.

4. Complete the transaction for the type of tender used to pay for the Auto Club card.

5. Show the customer the “Enroll by” date on the receipt. Explain that they must enroll in the Auto Club, by phone or online, within 200 days (just over six months) of the purchase date. Contact information for the Auto Club appears on the back of the card.

If they do not enroll by the date that appears on the receipt, they will forfeit the purchase value of the card and the card will become invalid.

Here is an example of a customer receipt for the purchase of a gold Auto Club card.REG # 5 05/27/2003 16:51:32 TRANS#22OPERATOR #: 1

66-9961-2 AUTO CLUB GOLD $ 91.95ENROLL BY: 13 December 2003

SUBTOTAL $ 91.95 G.S.T. $ 6.44 PROV SALES TAX $ 0.00 TOTAL $ 98.39 CASH TEND $ 100.00 CHANGE $ 1.61

In the province of Quebec, provincial sales tax is charged on the sale of Auto Club cards.

When you give customers their receipt, show them this date.

4-42 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 167: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Ringing in gift registry products

4.25 Ringing in gift registry products

Customers must give you the gift registry printout so you can either scan the bar code or type the 9-digit gift registry number, which appear on the printout. It is not possible to look up a gift registry number at the register.

1. Scan the gift registry bar code.

OR

Press Gift Registry. When prompted, type the 9-digit gift registry number and press Enter.

The message Gift Registry appears.

2. Now that the register is in gift registry mode, ring in the products associated with the gift registry.

3. If there are no more products to ring in, go to step 4.

OR

If the customer wants to purchase other products that are not associated with a gift registry, or wants to purchase products associated with a different gift registry, press Gift Registry. This tells the register that you have finished with the original gift registry. You can continue ringing in products as usual or repeat steps 1 to 3 for a different gift registry.

4. Complete the transaction depending on the type of tender used.

The receipt prints. The gift registry number appears below each product description.See the sample receipt on the next page.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-43Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 168: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

Best practiceAt the end of a gift registry transaction, make sure that the 9-digit gift registry number on the customer’s printout matches the number that appears on the receipt.

4.26 Refunding gift registry products

When customers return products associated with a gift registry, you must enter the gift registry number when processing the return to update the person’s gift registry. The gift registry number appears on the receipt below the product.

If a customer does not have the receipt, follow your usual store procedures.

1. Scan the gift registry bar code.

OR

Press Gift Registry. When prompted, type the 9-digit gift registry number and press Enter.

The message Gift Registry appears.

2. Now that the register is in gift registry mode, press Mdse Return.

3. Ring in the returned product and press Enter.

4. If the customer is returning other products, repeat steps 2 and 3.

REG # 5 01/08/2004 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 143-2311-6 KITCHENWORKS KN $ 17.99 GIFT REG # 00000081043-2133-0 B&D HNDMIXER & $ 34.99 GIFT REG # 00000081043-1999-6 FOOD PROCESSOR $ 99.99 GIFT REG # 000000810

SUBTOTAL $ 152.97 G.S.T. $ 10.71 PROV SALES TAX $ 12.24 TOTAL $ 175.92 CASH TEND $ 175.92 CHANGE $ 0.00 BASE CT MONEY $ 3.80

Thank you for shopping at Canadian TirePlease retain for returns or inquiries

Gift registry number

4-44 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 169: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Refunding gift registry products

5. If there are no more products to ring in, go to step 6.

OR

If the customer wants to return other products that are not associated with a gift registry, or wants to return products associated with a different gift registry, press Gift Registry. This tells the register that you have finished with the original gift registry. You can continue returning products as usual or repeat steps 1 to 5 for a different gift registry.

6. Complete the return as usual.The receipt prints. The gift registry number appears on it, right below the returned product (see below).

REG # 5 01/08/2004 16:51:32 TRANS#22 OPERATOR #: 1-1X43-2527-4 P/S IRON STEAM/ $ -17.99 GIFT REG # 000000786-1X43-2311-6 KITCHENWORKS KN $ -17.99 GIFT REG # 000000786

SUBTOTAL $ -35.98 G.S.T. $ -2.52 PROV SALES TAX $ -2.88 TOTAL $ -41.38 CT MONEY RET $ 0.00 CT MONEY NOT RET$ 0.80 CASH REFUND $ 40.58

Thank you for shopping at Canadian TirePlease retain for returns or inquiries

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 4-45Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 170: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Other situations

4-46 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 171: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

5 Problems

This chapter describes how to handle problem situations:

• If you make a mistake entering numbers or amounts• If you need to void a transaction that is already completed• If an item is not in the computer• If the wrong price is listed in the computer• If the register is offline• If an incomplete receipt is printed

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch5

Page 172: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

5.1 If you make a mistake

If you make a mistake, the way to recover from it depends on how far you have gone with a transaction. Use the following table to decide on the appropriate action:

In this situation... Do this...

You want to correct a number (a product number, amount, or account number) that you have just typed.

Use the arrow key to backspace over the incorrect numbers one at a time.orPress Clear to erase all of the typed numbers at once.

Note: This will not work if you have pressed any key other than a number key.

You pressed the wrong tender key. Just press Enter to cancel the tender key and then press the key for another tender type.

You want to void an item that you have rung in.

1. Press Item Correct. The last item entered is repeated on the screen and highlighted.2. If this is not the item you want to void, press Previous or Next until the correct item is highlighted.3. Press Void. A new line is added to the display with a negative amount.If you decide not to void an item, press Exit to return to normal processing.Note: Voided items do not appear on receipts.

You want to void the entire transaction before it has been tendered.

Press Void twice.

You want to void a transaction that is already complete.

See the Void Prior Transaction section on page 1-3.

5-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 173: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Void prior transaction

5.2 Void prior transaction

Use the following procedure to void a transaction that has already been completed. Only a person with the appropriate authorization level can perform voids.

Transactions from the current day can be voided at any time, even if the cashier has signed off and on again. However, you cannot void transactions from a previous day.

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 6 and press Enter.

3. If you see the message Enter Your Operator Number, a manager or supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password. This message does not appear in all stores.

The last transaction completed at the register is displayed.

4. Use the Previous and Next keys to page through the transactions until you find the one you want to void.

or

Enter a transaction number and press Enter to jump to a particular transaction.

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 174: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

5. Press Void twice to void the transaction.

8. If a window appears listing reasons for voiding prior transactions, type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

A validation slip is printed, which shows the reason for the void (if your store uses reason codes for voids) and has a line where the manager can sign.

When a transaction is voided, financial totals and inventory sales data are updated. An audit trail is created to keep track of the voided item.

Follow the steps in this box only if you are voiding a debit transaction:

6. If the following message appears:Purchase Correction: $0.00 (amount of transaction) <Void> to make debit correction<Mgt> to issue cash refund

If the customer wants the account credited: a. Press Void.

The message Customer Input Required appears.b. The customer must use the pinpad to swipe the debit card, verify

the amount, select the account and enter the PIN number.When the transaction is approved, a receipt is printed for the customer.

c. Remove the customer receipt and press Mgt.

Note: Customers can only receive a credit on their account if the transaction is voided. In all other situations, you would give them cash back.

If the customer wants a cash refund:a. Press Mgt.b. Give the customer the cash due. No receipt is printed for the

customer.

7. Press Exit to return to the normal customer screen.

5-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 175: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

When an item is not in the computer

5.3 When an item is not in the computer

When an item is not available in the computer, the register beeps and the message Not on File appears.

If the product number you entered does not make sense to the computer, the Not on File message disappears after about a second. Just enter the number again, then complete the transaction as usual.

or

If the product number you entered does make sense to the computer, a screen similar to the following appears:

(Other departments will appear on the screen at your store.)1. Type the number corresponding to the department the item belongs to

and press Enter. (Your supervisor can tell you the department numbers to use.)

2. Type the unit price and press Enter. (You may need to modify the taxes, as described in “Modify taxes on an item” on page 4-5.)

3. Complete the transaction as usual.

Tip: If you happen to enter the wrong product number, just select any department from the list of departments and press Enter. When the system asks for a unit price, press Exit. This clears the incorrect product number so you can enter another one.

Enter Product Or Qty X ProductUsing The ENTER Key

2x1234560 List Of Departments1. Automotive2. Housewares3. Sporting Goods

Enter Dept. #:__

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 176: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

5.4 When the message INVALID ENTRY appears

This message appears if:

• the format of the product number is incorrect, such as the wrong number of digits

• the check digit is incorrect• the system is expecting you to enter a tender

If the system is expecting you to enter a tender, complete the transaction or void it.

If you just entered a product number, enter it again.

5-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 177: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

When the wrong price is in the computer

5.5 When the wrong price is in the computer

Sometimes when you ring in an item, the price displayed on the screen is different from the price on the sticker. If you notice the discrepancy before ringing in another item, you can override the system price as follows:

1. Press Price Override.

The following message appears on the screen.

Price Override: Press <Exit> to exit, <Prev>, <Next> to locate entry or <Void> to override displayed entry

If the item whose price you want to override was not the last item entered, locate the item using the Previous and Next keys. When the correct item is highlighted, press Void.

or

If the item whose price you want to override was the last item entered, press Void.

2. If a window appears listing reasons for overriding the price, type the number of the appropriate reason and press Enter.

The following prompt appears:

Enter Override Amt:

3. Type the correct price and press Enter.

The line you selected is voided on the screen and a new line is added for the item, showing the new price.

The screen looks something like the following:

4. Continue with the transaction as usual.

5. If your registers have been set up to ask for a slip print, a prompt will appear on the register screen asking you to insert the Price Override form face up into the printer and press Mgt.

or

If your registers have been set up to print a validation slip, a prompt will appear on the screen asking you to press Mgt. Keep the validation

88-1224-4 pic bench $ 79.99

-1x88-1224-4 void pic bench $ -79.99

1x88-1224-4 pic bench $ 65.99

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 178: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

slip with your paperwork. Depending on the policy in place at your store, you may need a supervisor’s signature on the validation slip.

In some stores, the system will ask for a supervisor to enter their operator number and password before allowing the price to be changed.

The system records price overrides for auditing purposes.

5-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 179: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Signing on when the register is offline

5.6 Signing on when the register is offline

If the register is offline (not connected at the moment to the server(s) because of a problem of some sort), one of two things will happen when you enter your operator number and password:

• After a 40 second delay, a box with an error code flashes at the bottom of the screen and then the screen goes blank. (This happens when none of your servers are up.)or

• A box with an error code flashes at the bottom of the screen, the register beeps, and then the following message appears:* OFFLINE SIGNON * Will create new float.Press <Mgt> if OK, <Void> to abort.* Cannot access Control File! *(This happens when your primary server is down, but the secondary server is still up.)

You should make sure that a supervisor has been notified that the registers are offline. You can still sign on and use the registers.

Note: You cannot process gift card transactions or debit card transactions when the register is offline.

Use the following procedure to sign on when the registers are offline.

1. Press Mgt.

2. Use one of the following procedures:

or

If the signon screen appears:a. Type the number 1 and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Operator Number appears on the screen.

b. Type your operator number and press Enter.The message Enter Your Password appears on the screen.

c. Your supervisor must type the SUPERCODE instead of your confidential password and press Enter.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 180: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

The register is ready to use. The message Cannot Update Log At This Time will continue to blink at the bottom of your screen until your server(s) are back up. When the servers are back up, this message disappears and the message Updating appears briefly.

� Do not sign off the register while it is offline. If you do, any transactions that have not yet been sent to the server for processing will be lost and will have to be re-entered.

If you sign off by mistake while the register is offline, wait until the register is back online and then print the Totals Reading as described in section 6.13 of this manual. The end of the Totals Reading tape lists the details of the unprocessed transactions so you can re-enter them into the register. (Although the register allows you to print the Totals Reading while the register is offline, it is best to wait until it is back online to obtain the most accurate information.)

Stores with integrated debit can print the Totals Reading at any time if they want to see a list of processed and unprocessed transactions.

If the message Enter Your Cash Float appears:a. Press Mgt to continue with offline signon.b. If your starting float is included in your bank deposit for the

day, type the amount of your float and press Enter. If your starting float is kept apart, just press Enter without entering an amount.The message Enter Your US Cash Float appears on the screen.

c. As in the previous step, type the amount and press Enter or just press Enter.The message Enter Your CT Money Float appears on the screen.

d. As in the previous step, type the amount and press Enter or just press Enter.The message Press <Mgt> If Correct appears on the screen.

e. Press Mgt to continue or press Void to go back and re-enter your totals.

5-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 181: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Ringing in items when the register is offline

5.7 Ringing in items when the register is offline

Scanning, entering a product or UPC numberWhen you ring in items by scanning, by entering a product number, or by entering a UPC number, the following screen appears:

(Other departments will appear on the screen at your store.)1. Type the number corresponding to the department the item belongs to

and press Enter.

The message Enter Unit Price appears.

2. Type the unit price and press Enter.

Taxes are calculated on all items. If you need to modify the taxes, refer to the section “Modify taxes on an item” on page 4-5.

Entering unit prices over $500If you enter a unit price of over $500 when the register is offline, the system asks for verification in case you made a mistake. If the price is correct, just press Mgt to continue. If you made a mistake, press Enter to clear the unit price and re-enter it.

SKU numbersWhen you ring in items by typing a SKU number and pressing Enter, the procedure is the same as when the register is online. The only exception

Enter Product Or Qty X ProductUsing The ENTER Key

2x1234560 List Of Departments1. Automotive2. Housewares3. Sporting Goods

Enter Dept. #:__

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 5-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 182: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Problems

is that the product description does not appear on the receipt and on the screen. The SKU number appears instead.

5.8 When an incomplete receipt is printed

If a register detects an incomplete receipt, such as a receipt with a transaction line missing or a receipt that has jammed, the following prompt appears: “Destroy receipt and reprint for customer”.

To reprint the receipt:

If your registers have been set up to print receipts one line at a time, after each item is scanned (post printing is turned off), insert a piece of paper in the printer and press Slip Print.

or

If your registers have been set up to print receipts at the end of a transaction (post printing is turned on), press and hold down Shift and then press Slip Print.

TIP:When the register is offline, you will not be able to suspend or resume transactions, or void prior transactions. You will not be able to process any gift card transactions.

5-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 183: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

6 Administration

This chapter describes how to handle cashier tasks that do not necessarily involve customers:

• Pickups and loans• Paid outs• No sale• Opening the register drawers• End of shift procedures• Credit Start of Day• Reloading register programs• Reloading a new configuration• Initializing a debit pinpad• Changing your password• Locking your register• Printing the Totals Reading• Using and maintaining the cash register printer• Using the Symbol LS 9208 scanner

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch6

Page 184: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.1 Pickups and loans

Whenever money is added to the till (a loan) or removed from the till (a pickup) use the following procedure to record the amount taken or added. This ensures that your float remains correct.

Depending on the store, a manager or supervisor might have to enter his or her operator number and password.

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 5 and press Enter.

3. If the message Enter Your Operator Number appears, the manager or supervisor should type his or her operator number and press Enter, and then type the password and press Enter.

A screen similar to the following appears. The contents of the screen can vary from store to store.

(This list will vary depending on the store. Up to 20 tender types can appear.)

4. Type the number of the tender being added or removed and press Enter.

The message Press <Void> - Pickup, <Mgt> - Loan appears.

5. If money is being removed from the till, press Void.

or

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

1. Cash 11. US Cash

2. CT Money 12. US Trav Cheque

3. Gift Cert

4. Trav Cheque

5. Cheque

7. Credit Note

6-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 185: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Pickups and loans

If money is being added to the till, press Mgt.

The message Enter Pickup Amount or Enter Loan Amount appears.

Note: You can enter the amounts in stages if you want to. For example, you could type the total for all the $20 bills, and then the total for the $10 bills and so on.

6. Type the amount (in cents, as usual) and press Enter.

7. If you want to enter another amount, type it (in cents, as usual) and press Enter.

or

If you have finished, press Enter again.

A record of the adjustment prints on the cash register receipt tape.

The register is ready to ring in customer purchases again.

TIPS: As long as you have not entered an amount, you can cancel out of the Tender Adjustments screen by pressing Enter.Pressing Enter twice indicates that you have finished with the pickup or loan.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 186: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.2 Paid outs

Paid outs are used to keep track of money removed from the register, other than for customers.

Depending on the store, a manager or supervisor might have to enter his or her operator number and password.

1. Type the amount to be taken from the register and press Paid Out.

2. Press Cash twice.

3. Insert the Paid Out form into the printer, imprint it with the amount, and file it.

6.3 No sale

Handle “No sale” transactions as follows:

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 1 for “No Sale” and press Enter.

3. If you see the message Enter Your Operator Number, your supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password. This message does not appear in all stores.

The register drawers open.

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

6-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 187: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Opening the CT money drawer in the middle of a transaction

6.4 Opening the CT money drawer in the middle of a transaction

Use CT Money Drawer if you need to open the CT money drawer in the middle of a transaction.

At some stores, a manager or supervisor must enter their operator number and password before the CT money drawer will open.

1. Press CT Money Drawer to open the drawer.

2. If the message Enter Your Operator Number appears, the manager or supervisor should type his or her operator number and press Enter, and then type his or her password and press Enter.

6.5 Opening the register drawers when signed off

Use the following procedure to open both drawers when you are signed off. At some stores, a manager or supervisor must enter their operator number and password.

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 3 and press Enter.

3. If the message Enter Your Operator Number appears, the manager or supervisor should type his or her operator number and press Enter, and then type his or her password and press Enter.

The register drawers open.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 188: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.6 Shift end procedures

At the end of your shift, you need to take care of some administrative procedures and sign off.

Before you perform the shift-end procedures, you must:

• resume any suspended transactions (See “Suspend/resume transactions” on page 4-19)

• make sure all pickups and loans have been recorded (See “Pickups and loans” on page 6-2)

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 4 and press Enter to sign off.

� DO NOT SIGN OFF WHILE THE REGISTER IS OFFLINE. If you do, your totals will be lost.

3. Press Mgt to continue.

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

6-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 189: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Credit Start of Day

6.7 Credit Start of Day

This section describes how to manually send a “Credit Start of Day” transaction to CTFS. When the first cashier signs on in the morning, a “Credit Start of Day” transaction is automatically sent to CTFS. When it receives this transaction, CTFS sends down floor limits. CTFS also sends down product bonus data.

If the line to CTFS is down when the first cashier signs on, you will need to manually send a Credit Start of Day transaction as described below.

1. Wait 15 minutes after the first cashier notices that the line is down. (You can do it sooner if you notice from your credit card approval codes that the line is now up.)

2. Sign off if you are signed on.

3. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

4. Type the number 6 and press Enter.

5. Type your operator number and password if the system asks. (At some stores, the system is set up so that a manager or supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password.)

If the line is up, the message Sending Start Of Day appears and the screen goes blank. No further action is required. Sign on again.

If the line is still down, the message Start Of Day Failure appears.

6. If the Start of Day Failure message appears, wait 15 minutes and then repeat steps 2 and 3 once more.

7. If the line is still not up, call the Retail Systems Service Desk for assistance.

8. Once the line is up, a start of day request must be performed on the server.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 190: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.8 Reloading register programs

You should only turn registers off when you are instructed to do so to fix a problem.

Have the cashier sign off the register before performing these steps, if possible. If you are having a problem and cannot sign off, do one of the following:

• If the cashier will be signing on again after you reload the register, just go ahead and reload the register anyway.

• If the cashier will not be signing on again after you reload the register, a manager or supervisor will need to sign the cashier off manually at the POS server before reloading the register. This is described in the Performance Aids manual in PA 5.11, Sign a cashier off manually.

Note: This procedure does not initialize pinpads. For steps to initialize a pinpad, see the Performance Aids manual, PA 5.5, Maintaining debit pinpads.

1.Press and release the power button on the register you want to turn off.

DO NOT HOLD THE BUTTON DOWN.

The power button is on the lower right front of the register, under a plastic protective flap. You must lift the flap to access the power button.

2. Press and release the power button again to turn the register back on.

DO NOT HOLD THE BUTTON DOWN.

The register will begin to load and you will see messages appear on your screen. This takes about one minute to complete.

3. When the gray screen appears, the cashier can sign on again.

Flap is closed. Flap is open.

Power button.

6-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 191: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Reloading a new configuration

6.9 Reloading a new configuration

Whenever a change is made to the register configuration at the server, you must reload the configuration at the registers in order for it to become effective. Each register has to be reloaded individually. This process takes about 30 seconds.

Note: This procedure does not initialize pinpads. For steps to initialize a pinpad, see Section 6.10 on page 10.

1. Sign off as usual.

2. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

3. Type the number 5 and press Enter.

4. Type your operator number and password if the system asks for them. (At some stores, the system is set up so that a manager or supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password.)

Messages will flash briefly at the bottom of the screen.

5. When the screen goes blank, press Mgt.

You can now sign back on to the register.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 192: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.10 Initializing a debit pinpad

Sometimes a debit pinpad may stop communicating with the register. If this happens, you need to initialize the pinpad to reset the connection.

1. Sign off as usual.

2. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

3. Type the number 7 and press Enter.

4. Type your operator number and password if the system asks for them. (At some stores, the system is set up so that a manager or supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password.)

The message Initializing : Pinpad will flash briefly at the bottom of the screen.

5. When the screen goes blank, press Mgt.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

6-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 193: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Changing your password

6.11 Changing your password

This section describes how to change your password. In most stores, a message will appear at the register every few weeks to ask you to change your password. You can also change your password any time you want, even when no message appears at the register.

Passwords must be at least 4 digits but cannot exceed 10 digits.

To change your password when a message appears at the registerReminder messages start appearing at the register a few days before your password is due to expire, when you sign on for the day.

To change your password, press Mgt. Type your new password and press Enter. Type your password a second time and press Enter.

or

To continue without changing your password, press Void.

Note: If you press Void when the message Your password has expired appears, the system signs you off immediately. You will not be able to use the register until you sign on again and change your password.

Message When does message appear?

Your password expires in NN day(s). Do you want to change it now?

A few days before your password is due to expire. If you don’t change your password, the message appears every day until the expiry date.

Your password expires today. Do you want to change it now?

On the day your password expires.

Your password has expired. Do you want to change it now?

After the day your password expires.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 194: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

To change your password when no message appears at the register

You must change your password before you sign on. Once you have signed on, you cannot access the menu for changing your password.

1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 4 and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Operator Number appears on the screen.

3. Type your operator number and press Enter.

The message Enter Your Password appears on the screen.

4. Type your password and press Enter.

The message Enter Your New Password appears.

5. Type your new password and press Enter.

The message Again appears.

6. Type your new password again for verification and press Enter.

Passwords must be at least 4 digits long and cannot exceed 10 digits. If you forget your password, the supervisor or manager can change it for you.

1. Sign On Register

2. Sign On Register - Training Mode

3. Open Cash Drawers

4. Change A User Password

5. Reload Configuration

6. Credit Start of Day

7. Initialize Pinpad

6-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 195: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Locking and unlocking your register

6.12 Locking and unlocking your register

If you are leaving your register for any reason, be sure to lock it first. At some stores, the system is set up so that a manager or supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password.

To lock the register:1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 2 and press Enter.

The message Register Locked appears on the screen.

To unlock the register:1. Press Mgt.

2. Type your operator number and password.

You can unlock any register that you locked yourself. However, special authorization is required to unlock someone else’s register. When you unlock someone else’s register, the totals will still be associated with the original operator and the original operator will still be signed on.

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-13Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 196: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.13 Printing the Totals Reading (“Reads”)

This section describes how to print the Totals Reading on the register tape (sometimes called the “Reads”).

The Totals Reading tape tells you how much the cashier’s deposit should be. Most stores use the Cashier Totals report that the Cash Balancer prints for this purpose, because you have to print it anyway and it shows the same information. However, some stores like to print a Totals Reading at the register at the end of a cashier’s shift as well. You can print the Totals Reading even when the register is offline, but it is best to wait until the register is back online. If you are running a register in French, the Totals Reading appears in French.

The Totals Reading is useful if a cashier accidentally signs off while the register is offline. In that situation, any transactions that have not yet been sent to the server are lost and must be re-entered. The details of these unprocessed transactions appear at the end of the Totals Reading tape so that you can re-enter them.

Note: In stores using the Daily cash balancing method with rollover tenders, the float totals on this report show the rolled over amounts.

To print the Totals Reading:1. Press Mgt.

The following screen appears:

2. Type the number 3 and press Enter.

The message Print Totals Reading appears on the screen, and the totals start to print on the register tape.

3. Press Mgt when the report is complete.

4. Type the number 4, Sign Off and press Enter.

1. No Sale

2. Lock Register

3. Totals Reading

4. Sign Off

5. Tender Adjustments

6. Void Prior Transaction

6-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 197: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Printing the Totals Reading (“Reads”)

5. Press Mgt.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-15Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 198: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.14 Using the IBM 4610 thermal printer

The following diagrams show the parts of the IBM 4610 thermal printer:

The printer has two feed buttons and two LED indicator lights:

• Customer receipt feed button - The button farthest from you. Press this button to advance the receipt paper.

• Document feed button - The button closest to you. Press this button to advance a document in the document printer.

Note: Press both feed buttons at the same time to open and close the throat of the document printer.

• Printer ready LED - The light farthest from you. When this light is on, the printer is powered on and ready to print. If it is blinking, either the printer is out of paper or the cover is open.

• Document present LED - The light closest to you. It lights up when a document is inserted far enough into the printer. If it is blinking, the printer is waiting for you to insert a document in the document printer.

Avoiding paper jamsTo avoid paper jams and to ensure the document printer prints properly:

• Place documents into the printer gently.• Only insert documents that are wider than two inches and longer than

three inches (no sticky notes, staples or paper clips).• Insert documents that are as curl- and wrinkle-free as possible.• Do not insert black documents. The thermal printer uses an optical

sensor that may not recognize black paper. If it does not recognize the paper, it will not print.

6-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 199: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Using the IBM 4610 thermal printer

• Do not use thermal paper in the document printer. Because it is so thin, it can jam in the printer easily.

If a paper jam occurs:1. Press both feed buttons at the same time to open the throat of the

document printer.

2. Remove the paper.

3. Press both feed buttons again to close the throat.

If you need to print a duplicate receipt from the last transaction because of a paper jam, hold down Shift and press Slip Print.

Printing the correct side of the documentWhen you insert a form into the printer, the side facing up is imprinted. Therefore, when inserting a cheque or gift certificate or any other form with information on the face, you should insert it face down to imprint the back of the form.

Printing formsSometimes you need to imprint a form when the register is not requesting you to. For example, you may need to imprint a warehouse requisition form or a 3-part form for a customer.

Other times, you may not want to print a form that the system is expecting you to print. This happens in training mode especially.

To print a form upon request:1. Press Slip Print.

2. Insert the form into the printer and press Mgt. (The side facing up will be imprinted.)

3. Remove the form from the printer.

You can only do this after a transaction is complete.

To skip printing a form that the system expects you to print:1. Press Mgt.

2. Press Exit.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-17Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 200: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

To print a duplicate receipt from the last transaction:You would print a duplicate receipt if a paper jam occurs or you need a duplicate to attach to a manufacturer’s coupon.

1. Press and hold down Shift.

2. Press Slip Print.

Loading paper into the receipt printer1. Open the printer cover. Remove any unused paper and the empty

paper roll core from the paper roll bucket.

2. Drop the new paper roll in the printer with the leading edge of the paper facing away from you.

3. Place the leading edge of the paper over the metal guide (see below).

If you are inserting a new roll, make sure the edge of the paper does not have glue on it.

or

If you are inserting a previously used roll, make sure the edge of the paper is a straight cut.

4. Close the paper cover.

6-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 201: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Using the IBM 4610 thermal printer

5. Press the customer receipt feed button (the button farthest from you) to advance the paper approximately 6 inches to ensure it is aligned correctly.

Note: Do not pull the receipt paper out of the printer when the paper cover is closed. The paper may jam and receipts may not print properly. Always use the customer receipt feed button to advance the paper.

Replacing the ribbon in the document printer1. Open the ribbon cover.

The print head will move to a position to facilitate easy loading of the ribbon.

2. Remove the ribbon cartridge by lifting it straight up.

You may need to grab the body of the cartridge rather than the top to remove it.

3. Before inserting the new cartridge, tighten the ribbon tension by turning the knob on the right side of the cartridge.

4. Place the new cartridge into position.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-19Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 202: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

You will know it is placed correctly when the notches on the side of the cartridge snap into place on the printer guides.

5. Turn the knob on the cartridge until the ribbon slides into place between the print head and the ribbon shield.

6. Close the paper cover.

Cleaning the print headYou should clean the print head whenever the print quality is poor.

To clean the print head:

1. Open the paper cover.

Caution: The print head is extremely hot! Do not touch until cool.

2. Using a cotton swab (Q-Tip) soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the print head several times on its print line and on the surrounding area.

3. Wipe off any excess alcohol with a dry swab.

6-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 203: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Using the IBM 4610 thermal printer

TroubleshootingThe following table lists situations that you may encounter while using the thermal printers. If you cannot resolve the problem after referring to this table, call the Retail Systems Help Desk.

I n t h i s s i t u a t i o n C h e c k t h a t . . .

The printer is not printing.

The Printer Ready indicator light is off.

• all cables are plugged into the printer.• the power supply is connected to an AC power

source.

The Printer Ready indicator light is blinking.

• both the paper and ribbon covers are closed.• the receipt printer paper is loaded correctly. Close

the cover and push the top button to feed a small amount of paper.

• there are no obstructions in the document printer. Check the print path for paper jams.

The receipt paper is advancing but the printer is not printing.

• the receipt printer paper is loaded correctly. It may be upside down.

• the print head is clean.

The document printer is not printing.

• there are no obstructions in the document printer. Check the print path for paper jams.

• the ribbon is installed correctly.• the ribbon is not worn out. It may need replacing.• the form is not too dark. The printer cannot detect

black paper.

The document printer is jamming.

• you placed the form in the printer gently. Do not force it.

• the form is not too small. It must be wider than 2 inches and longer than 3 inches.

• the form does not have curled edges and is not wrinkled.

To clear a paper jam, press both feed buttons at the same time. This opens the throat of the document printer. Remove the paper, then press both buttons again to close the throat.

The document printer is not advancing the paper.

• the throat of the document printer is closed. Press both feed buttons at the same time to close it.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 6-21Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 204: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Administration

6.15 Using the Symbol LS 9208 scanner

The scanner looks like this:

Setting the loudness of the beepThe scanner has three volume settings - low, medium and high. To change the volume of the beep:

1. Press and hold the trigger on the side of the scanner.

After about 5 seconds, the scanner emits 2 beeps at the low setting, 2 beeps at the medium setting, and 2 beeps at the high setting.

2. Release the trigger after you hear the desired volume setting.

Troubleshooting problems with the scannerIf the scanner does not work when you try to scan a product:

• Try again with the bar code closer to the scanner window.• Try scanning another bar code. If that is successful, it is likely that the

original problem was due to a damaged bar code. • If the scanner has not been used for a while, it may be in “sleep”

mode. Press and release the trigger on the side of the scanner to wake it up.

• Make sure the cable at the back of the scanner is securely connected.• Contact the Retail Systems Service Desk.

Scanner in cradle Scanner back Scanner out of cradle

Trigger

6-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 205: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

TeamPOS

7 Quick references

This chapter contains information to which you may need to refer as you work with the rest of this manual.

Section 7.1: Debit card situations

Section 7.2: Credit card approvals

Section 7.3: Gift card and Auto Club card situations

Section 7.4: Transaction references

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-1Retail Systems – July 2005

R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch7

Page 206: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

7.1 Debit card situations

This section describes problem situations that can occur during a debit card transaction, and the procedure for dealing with each situation.

• Communication lines downYou cannot accept debit cards as tender whenever communication lines are down (either to CTFS or between CTFS and the banks), because there is no manual process to withdraw funds from a customer’s account.

• Customer swipes card wrong wayThe debit card must be swiped with the stripe facing down and to the right.

• Customer swipes wrong cardIf the customer swipes another card instead of a debit card, the message Card not supported appears at the pinpad. The customer should then swipe the debit card or press Cancel to cancel the transaction.

• Customer enters wrong PINIf the customer enters the PIN number incorrectly, the message PIN Error. Please Re-try. appears at the pinpad and the message Retry Requested appears at the register. The customer must re-enter the PIN number or press Cancel to cancel the transaction.

• Customer selects wrong accountIf the customer selects an account type that he or she doesn’t have, a message “Sav”/”Chequing” not set up - Refer to Branch appears at the pinpad, and the message Retry Requested. No “Saving”/“Chequing” acct - Retry/Cancel appears at the register. The customer must select a different account or cancel the transaction.

• Customer cancels transactionIf the customer decides to cancel the transaction by pressing Cancel on the pinpad, the message *Debit Trans Aborted* Press <Enter> appears at the register. Press Enter and select another tender to complete the transaction.

• Customer did not respond in timeIf the customer takes too long to enter information at the pinpad, the message * Customer Input Timeout. Debit Trans Incomplete* Press <Enter> appears at the register. The message Not Completed. Please Retry appears at the pinpad. Press Enter and select another tender to complete the transaction.

7-2 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 207: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Credit card approvals

7.2 Credit card approvals

This section describes the messages that can appear when a credit card is not approved, and the procedure for dealing with each situation.

• Card expiredIf the message Card Expired - Enter 1-Reenter 2-Cont appears, type one of the following numbers and press Enter: •1 to enter a new tender•2 if you have obtained permission to use an expired card

• Card Approved, Approved with Conditions, or Not ApprovedIf a card is unconditionally approved (code 00 or 08), the system continues automatically. Otherwise, one of the following messages will be displayed, followed by a code:•App On Cond •Referral •Call and Verify CTM-OTC •Declined•Account Number Error

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-3Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 208: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

.

Proceed as follows for each message:Approved 00 Automatic approval.

No action is required.Approved On Condition

01 Check the customer’s ID.

Approved, Line Down 08 The online credit authorization line is down, but the sale is approved because the charge total is below the authorized limit set by CTFS.No action is required.

Referral 10

19

Call the card issuer for an approval number. (Visa, MasterCard, CTC)

Call for an approval number. The online credit authorization line is down, and the charge total is above the authorized limit set by CTFS.Type the number 2 and press Enter. Then type the approval # given to you over the phone and press Enter. You must enter an approval #to complete the transaction.orType the number 1 and press Enter if an approval number is not given to you or if the customer wishes to use another tender type.

Call and Verify CTM-OTC

17 Call CTFS for an approval number. If the line to CTFS is down, this code appears for Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card redemptions overthe floor limit.

Type the number 2 and press Enter. Then type the approval # given to you over the phone and press Enter.orType the number 1 and press Enter if an approval number is not given to you or if the customer wishes to use another tender type.

Declined 2021

22

The customer is not authorized to charge to this card.The customer is not authorized to charge to this card. Do not return the card to the customer.The customer is not authorized to charge to this card. Do not return the card to the customer. You will receive a reward from CTFS. Press Enter. Then complete the transaction with another tender typeorPress Void twice to void the transaction.

7-4 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 209: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Credit card approvals

• If you notice Com Err displayed at the bottom left of your screen, take down the number beside Com Err and tell your supervisor. This means that there is a problem with your online authorization system. You can continue to use the register as described above until the problem is fixed.

• For commercial cards, the system will request a purchase order number. Ask the customer for this and enter it when requested. If there is no purchase order number, press Enter and continue with the transaction.

Invalid Account Number

91 An invalid account number has been entered. Press Enter and then retry the transaction. If you still get the InvalidAccount message, call the card issuer.

Insufficient CTM On The Card Balance

93 The customer’s Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card balance is displayed. The customer’s balance is too low for the requested redemption amount.Press Enter and then enter a lower redemption amount. If the customer does not have any Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, complete the transaction without redeeming, or use another tender.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-5Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 210: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

7.3 Gift card and Auto Club card situations and error messages

This section describes problem situations that can occur during a gift card transaction, and the procedure for dealing with each situation. It also describes two problem situations related to Auto Club cards.

• Communication lines down - gift card or Auto Club cardYou cannot accept gift cards as tender, sell gift cards, do a balance inquiry on a gift card, or refund a purchase back onto a gift card when the communication lines are down to CTFS, because CTFS stores the gift card balances by account number. Only the account number is stored on the gift card’s magnetic stripe, not the balance.If you try to process a gift card transaction when the communication lines are down to CTFS, the message Process currently unavailable appears. This message also appears if you try to sell an Auto Club card when the lines are down.

• Gift card or Auto Club card does not swipeIf a new gift card or Auto Club card that a customer is purchasing does not swipe, keep it aside and get another one from the shelf for the customer. You can’t sell gift cards or Auto Club cards with a defective magnetic stripe. Turn the defective card in with your paperwork. Someone should call the Dealer Hotline to report the card.

The following messages may appear at the register if a gift card is declined:

Card expired

Once gift cards have expired the register will not accept them, regardless of whether the gift card has a balance. Ask the customer to pay using another tender.

Gift card only has a balance of $xx.xx

If you enter an amount to redeem that is higher than the gift card balance, the register will display this message. Redeem an amount that does not exceed the balance or press Mgt to use up the remaining gift card amount, and then finish the transaction using another tender.

Account closed

Ask the customer to pay using another tender.

7-6 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 211: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Gift card and Auto Club card situations and error messages

Invalid card number verification

This message appears if the gift card won’t swipe and you key in the numbers incorrectly. Just key in the numbers again.

Card already active

This message appears if a customer is purchasing a gift card, and the card has already been activated. This would most likely happen if you have already activated a card and try to activate it again. If that is not the problem, set the gift card aside and get another one from the shelf for the customer. Turn the defective card in with your paperwork - someone should call the Dealer Hotline to report the card.

Card not effective

This message appears if a customer is purchasing a gift card, but there is a problem with the account number. Keep the card aside and get another card from the shelf for the customer. Turn the defective card in with your paperwork - someone should call the Dealer Hotline to report the card.

Maximum balance exceeded

This message appears if a customer is returning merchandise paid for using a gift card, and the amount of the refund would exceed the face value of the card. (Remember, you can put the refund onto any gift card - it doesn’t have to be the same one used in the purchase.) If the customer has a receipt, give a cash refund instead of putting it back onto the gift card. If the customer does not have a receipt, issue a credit note.

Card not active

The gift card has never been purchased. This message appears if a customer tries to pay using a gift card that has not been paid for. Inform the customer that the gift card is not active and request another tender. If the customer has questions, call your supervisor who can call CTFS for clarification. Do not put the card back on the shelf.

Card blocked

This message appears if a customer uses a gift card with an account that has been removed from the system (such as for a stolen gift card). Keep the gift card and call your supervisor, who can call CTFS for further instructions. Do not put the gift card back on the shelf.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-7Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 212: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Reload amount exceeds $1000.00 limit

If a customer wants to reload $1000.00 or more onto a loadable gift card, a manager’s authorization is required. Your supervisor must enter his or her operator number and password before you can complete the transaction.

Reload amount must exceed $5.00

Customers cannot reload less than $5.00 onto a loadable gift card.

*Declined* Card not reloadable

This message appears if you try to load money onto a gift card with a fixed dollar value, such as a $25 gift card. You can only reload money onto a loadable gift card.

7-8 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 213: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

7.4 Transaction quick reference

The next pages contain condensed instructions for performing the types of transactions described in this manual.

The categories covered are:

• Sales using various tenders, both single and split tenders• Returns using various tenders• Special situations

Cash1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Cash twice (if exact change).

or

Type amount tendered and press Cash.

3. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change to customer.

Debit card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Debit Card twice.

3. Customer swipes card.

4. Tear off customer receipt and press Mgt orpress Void to print another copy of customer receipt.

5. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ to customer.

Debit card (cash back)1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Debit Card.

3. Type amount to be debited and press Enter.

4. Tear off customer receipt and press Mgt orpress Void to print another copy of customer receipt.

5. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and cash to customer.

SALES TRANSACTIONS

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-9Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 214: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Credit card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe card or enter account number.

4. Redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

5. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

6. Get signature.

7. Give receipt and card to customer.

CTC commercial card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe card or enter account number.

4. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

5. Type PO number, if any, and press Enter.

6. Tear off customer receipt and get signature.

7. Give receipt and card to customer.

Cheque1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Cheque twice.

3. (Swipe card or enter account number.)

4. Imprint cheque.

5. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and cash to customer.

Cheque (for more than the purchase)1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of cheque and press Cheque.

3. (Swipe card or enter account number.)

4. Imprint cheque.

5. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and cash to customer.

7-10 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 215: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

CT ‘Money’1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ tendered and press CT Money In.

3. Give receipt and change to customer.

Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The CardThese steps are the same as if the customer was paying by credit card.

1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe card or enter account number.

4. Redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card.

5. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

6. Tear off customer receipt and get signature.

7. Give receipt and card to customer.

Gift Card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Gift Card.

3. Swipe gift card or type all 19 digits and press Enter.

4. If customer is putting partial amount of purchase on gift card, type amount to put on gift card and press Enter. Process other tenders.

or

If customer is putting whole purchase on gift card, press Gift Card again.

5. Give receipt and CT ‘Money’ to the customer.

Gift certificate1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of gift certificate and hold down Shift as you press Gift Cert.

3. Imprint gift certificate.

4. Give receipt and change to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-11Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 216: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Traveler’s cheque1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of traveler’s cheque.

3. Press Shift and Trav Cheq simultaneously.

4. Imprint traveler’s cheque.

5. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change to customer.

Deferred credit1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Deferred.

3. Press Charge twice.

4. Swipe card or enter account number.

5. Redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

6. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

7. Tear off receipt and get signature.

8. Give receipt to customer.

US tenders1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press US Tender.

3. Type amount tendered.

4. Press Cash or Cheque or Shift and Trav Cheque, depending on type of tender.

5. Complete the transaction as you would for Canadian tenders.

House account charge1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Press Mgt.

4. Type the number 5 and press Enter.

5. Type house account number and press Enter.

6. Follow store procedures to complete the transaction.

7-12 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 217: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Credit notes1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of credit note.

3. Press Cr Note Redeem.

4. Complete the transaction.

Gift Registry – ringing in products1. Scan the gift registry bar code.

ORPress Gift Registry, type the 9-digit gift registry number and press Enter.

2. Ring in purchases associated with the gift registry.

3. If there are no more products to ring in, complete the transaction.ORIf the customer wants to purchase other products that are not on the gift registry or that are on another gift registry, press Gift Registry. Continue ringing in products as usual or repeat steps 1 to 3 for a different gift registry.

Cash and CT ‘Money’1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ tendered.

3. Press CT Money In.

4. Type amount of cash tendered.

5. Press Cash.

6. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change to customer.

Cash and manufacturer’s coupon1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of the coupon.

3. Press Manufac Coupon.

4. Type amount of cash tendered.

5. Press Cash.

6. Imprint coupon.

7. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-13Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 218: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Cash and CTC promo coupon1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of the coupon.

3. Press CTC Promo.

4. Type amount of cash tendered.

5. Press Cash.

6. Imprint coupon.

7. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change to customer.

Cash and cheque1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of cash tendered.

3. Press Cash.

4. Press Cheque twice or type amount and press Cheque.

5. Swipe card or enter account number.

6. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

7. Imprint cheque.

8. Give receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change (if any) to customer.

Cash and debit card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of cash tendered.

3. Press Cash.

4. Press Debit Card twice or type amount and press Debit Card.

5. Customer swipes card.

6. Give card, receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change (if any) to customer.

7-14 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 219: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Credit Card and debit card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount to be charged.

3. Press Charge.

4. Swipe card or enter account number.

5. Redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

6. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

7. Tear off receipt and get signature.

8. Press Debit Card twice.

9. Give cards, receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change (if any) to customer.

Cash and credit card1. Ring in purchases.

2. Type amount of cash tendered.

3. Press Cash.

4. Press Charge twice or type amount and press Charge.

5. Swipe card or enter account number.

6. Redeem Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

7. Handle conditional approval, if applicable.

8. Tear off receipt and get signature.

9. Give card, receipt, CT ‘Money’ and change (if any) to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-15Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 220: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

.

Putting the register into return mode1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Press Enter.

3. Ring in items returned.

4. Complete the transaction as usual.

Taking the register out of return mode1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Press Enter.

The “Retn Mode” message disappears.

Returns involving extra CT ‘Money’1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. If receipt shows reason for extra CTM:

- Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

- Select reason from list.

- Select type of CTM, if necessary.

- Type amount of “Extra CT Money” shown on receipt, if necessary.

5. Press Cash twice.

6. If receipt shows reason for extra CTM:

- Press Enter.

If receipt does NOT show reason for extra CTM:

- Type amount of “Extra CT Money” shown on receipt.

7. Type amount of CTM.

8. Imprint Return Product form.

9. Give receipt and cash to customer.

RETURNS

7-16 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 221: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Returns involving extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. If receipt shows reason for extra CTM-OTC:

- Press Mdse Return, then Extra CT Money.

- Select reason from list.

- Select type of CTM-OTC, if necessary.

- If type of CTM-OTC is a percentage or multiple, enter amount of “XXXX CT Money-Card” shown near bottom receipt, if necessary. (Where XXXX is the reason, such as Senior’s.)

- If type of CTM-OTC is a flat dollar amount, enter amount of “XXXX Extra CT Money” shown at top of receipt, if necessary. (Where XXXX is the reason, such as Senior’s.)

5. Press Charge twice.

6. Swipe card or enter account number.

7. If receipt shows “Store Bonus CT Money-Card”:

- Type amount and press Enter.

If receipt does NOT show “Store Bonus CT Money-Card”:

- Press Enter.

8. If receipt shows “Product Bonus CT Money-Card”:

- Type amount and press Enter.

If receipt does NOT show “Product Bonus CT Money-Card”:

- Press Enter.

9. Imprint Return Product form.

10. Give receipt and card to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-17Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 222: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Cash1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Cash twice.

5. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

6. Imprint Return Product form.

7. Give receipt and cash to customer.

Debit card1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Cash twice.

5. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

6. Imprint Return Product form.

7. Give cash and receipt to customer.

Credit card1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Charge twice.

5. Swipe card or enter account number.

6. Tear off customer receipt and get signature.

7. Handle extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

8. Imprint Return Product form.

9. Give receipt and card to customer.

7-18 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 223: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Credit note(We recommend that you do not issue credit notes for a transaction where a CTC retail card or Options Mastercard was used and where extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card was issued. In that case, it is easier just to refund the dollar amount to the credit card.)1. Press Cr Note Issue.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Cash twice.

5. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

6. Imprint Return Product form.

7. Give copy of credit note to customer.

Gift Card1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Gift Card.

5. Swipe gift card or type all 19 digits and press Enter.

6. If entire purchase was paid with gift card, press Gift Card again.

or

If part of purchase was paid with gift card, type gift card amount and press Enter.

7. Handle other tenders if applicable.

8. Handle extra CT ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

9. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

If the customer does not return the full amount of CT ‘Money’, this amount is deducted from the last tender entered. If the last tender entered is a gift card, the amount of CT ‘Money’ owing will be deducted from the gift card balance.

10. Imprint the Return Product form.

11. Give receipt and gift card to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-19Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 224: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Deferred credit1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in purchases.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Press Deferred.

5. Press Charge twice.

6. Swipe card or enter account number.

7. Handle bonus CT ‘Money’ On The Card, if applicable.

8. Tear off receipt and get signature.

9. Give receipt to customer.

Gift Registry – returning products1. Scan the gift registry bar code.

OR

Press Gift Registry, type the 9-digit gift registry number and press Enter.

2. Press Mdse Return.

3. Ring in returned product and press Enter.

4. To ring in more returned products, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. If there are no more products to ring in, complete the return as usual.

OR

If the customer wants to return other products that are not on the gift registry or that are on another gift registry, press Gift Registry. Continue ringing in products as usual or repeat steps 1 to 5 for a different gift registry.

Cash and credit card(Process tenders in the order that they appear on the receipt.)1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Type amount of cash refund and press Cash.

5. Press Charge twice.

6. Swipe card or enter account number.

7-20 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 225: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

7. Handle bonus CT ‘Money’ On The Card and CT ‘Money’, if applicable.

8. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

9. Tear off customer receipt and get signature.

10. Imprint Return Product form.

11. Give receipt and card to customer.

Cash and debit card1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Type amount of cash refund and press Cash.

5. Press Cash twice.

6. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

7. Imprint Return Product form.

8. Give receipt and cash to customer.

Debit Card and credit card(Process tenders in the order that they appear on the receipt.)1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Type amount of cash refund and press Cash.

5. Press Charge twice.

6. Swipe credit card or enter account number.

7. Handle bonus CT ‘Money’ On The Card and CT ‘Money’, if applicable.

8. Type amount of CT ‘Money’ returned.

9. Tear off customer receipt and get signature.

10. Imprint Return Product form.

11. Give receipt and card to customer.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-21Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 226: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Mixed transactionsRecommendation: Process returns separately from purchases instead of as a mixed transaction.

1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Ring in items returned.

3. Press Mgt if price OK, or press Void and type new price.

4. Ring in items purchased.

5. Complete the transaction according to the type of tender.

Tax exempt purchases1. Ring in purchases.

2. Press Tax Exempt.

3. Select the appropriate tax.

4. Enter the exemption number.

5. Complete the transaction as usual.

Modify taxes on an item1. Press Modify Tax.

2. Ring in the non-taxable item.

3. Select the appropriate tax.

4. Press Enter.

5. Complete the transaction as usual.

Surtaxes1. Ring in the item.

2. Type the amount of the surtax.

3. Press Surtax.

4. Complete the transaction as usual.

SPECIAL SITUATIONS

7-22 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 227: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Transaction exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card1. Ring in items.

2. Press Tax Exempt.

3. Type the number 9 and press Enter.

4. Type exemption number, if any, and press Enter.

5. Complete the transaction as usual.

Item exempt from CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card1. Press Modify Tax.

2. Ring in item.

3. Type the number 9 and press Enter.

4. Press Mgt to confirm.

5. Complete the transaction as usual.

Transaction discount(Only applies if the discount type and amount have not been pre-set on the server. If they have been pre-set, the cashier only needs to select the discount name.)1. Ring in items to be discounted.

2. Press Trans Discount.

3. Select the discount name.

4. Select % or $ off and enter amount.

5. Ring in items to which discount doesn’t apply.

6. Complete the transaction as usual.

7. Imprint Customer Discount form.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-23Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 228: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Item discount(Where taxes, CT ‘Money’ and CT ‘Money’ On The Card are discounted too. Only applies if the discount type and amount have not been pre-set on the server. If they have been pre-set, the cashier only needs to select the discount name.)1. Ring in items to be discounted.

2. Press Item Discount.

3. Select the discount name.

4. Select % or $ off and enter amount.

5. Ring in items to which no discount applies.

6. Complete the transaction as usual.

7. Imprint Item Discount form.

Item discount(Where taxes, CT ‘Money’ and ‘Money’ On The Card are not discounted. Only applies if the discount type and amount have not been pre-set on the server. If they have been pre-set, the cashier only needs to select the discount name.)1. Ring in item to be discounted.

2. Press Modify Tax.

3. Press Item Discount.

4. Select the discount name.

5. Select % or $ off and enter amount.

6. Select tax(es) and/or CT ‘Money’.

7. Ring in items to which no discount applies.

8. Complete the transaction as usual.

9. Imprint Item Discount form.

7-24 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 229: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Increasing CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card at register(Only applies if the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card have not been pre-set on the server. If they have been pre-set, the cashier only needs to select a reason code.)1. Ring in items.

2. Press Extra CT Money.

3. Select reason code.

4. Select type of extra CT Money: $, % or X.

5. Type amount of $, % or X.

6. Complete the transaction as usual.

Decreasing CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card at register(Only applies if the type and amount of extra CT ‘Money’ or CT ‘Money’ On The Card have not been pre-set on the server. If they have been pre-set, the cashier only needs to select a reason code.)1. Ring in items.

2. Press Mdse Return.

3. Press Extra CT Money.

4. Select reason code.

5. Select type of extra CT ‘Money’: $, % or X.

6. Type amount of $, % or X.

7. Complete the transaction as usual.

Cash advances1. Enter amount of cash advance.

2. Press Cash Advance.

3. Swipe card or enter account number/expiry date.

4. Press Cash twice.

5. Get signature on second receipt.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-25Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 230: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Payment on account1. Enter amount of payment.

2. Press Payment.

3. Swipe card or enter account number/expiry date.

4. Press the appropriate tender key twice.

5. Get signature on second receipt.

6. NO CARD? Use account 1111111116

Payment on house account1. Enter amount of payment.

2. Press Payment.

3. Press Mgt and then enter the number 5.

4. Enter account number and expiry date.

5. Press the appropriate tender key twice.

6. Print credit slip or second receipt, and get signature.

Selling gift cards1. Ring in gift card.

2. Swipe gift card. (Can’t sell gift cards that don’t swipe.)

3. Verify that amount on gift card matches amount on screen.

4. Process customer’s payment as usual.

5. Give receipt to the customer, pointing out expiry date and amount of gift card.

Selling loadable gift cards1. Ring in gift card.

2. Swipe gift card. (Can’t sell gift cards that don’t swipe.)

3. Type amount customer wants to load onto gift card.

4. Verify that amount on screen matches amount requested.

5. Process customer’s payment as usual.

6. Give receipt to the customer, pointing out expiry date and amount of gift card.

7-26 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 231: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Reloading gift cardsYou can only reload loadable gift cards.

1. Press Gift Card.

2. Swipe gift card or type all 19 digits and press Enter.

3. Press Mgt.

4. Type amount customer wants to reload.

5. If reload is approved, process customer’s payment as usual.

6. Give receipt to customer, pointing out new expiry date and amount of gift card.

Selling Auto Club cards1. Ring in Auto Club card.

2. Swipe Auto Club card. (Can’t sell cards that don’t swipe.)

3. Verify that amount on card packaging matches amount on screen.

4. Process customer’s payment as usual.

5. Give receipt to the customer, pointing out “Enroll by” date. Customers have 200 days (just over six months) from purchase date to enroll in Auto Club.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-27Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 232: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Suspending transactions1. Ring in items.

2. Press Suspend.

3. Tear off receipt and keep it handy.

Resuming transactions1. Press Resume.

2. Enter reference number from the receipt.

3. Press Mgt.

4. Complete the transaction as usual.

Cashing cheques1. Type the non-inventory SKU number.

2. Press Non-Inv SKU.

3. Enter amount of cheque.

4. Press Cheque.

5. Press Mgt and then type the number 99.

6. Give cash to the customer.

7. Imprint the cheque.

Taking deposits1. Enter amount of deposit.

2. Press Deposit.

3. Complete the transaction for the type of tender.

4. Imprint the deposit form.

5. Give deposit receipt to customer.

Applying deposits to purchases1. Ring in the items.

2. Press Mdse Return.

3. Enter amount of deposit.

4. Press Deposit.

5. Complete the transaction as usual for the type of tender.

7-28 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 233: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Refunding deposits1. Press Mdse Return.

2. Enter amount of deposit.

3. Press Deposit.

4. Complete the transaction as usual for the type of tender.

Castings1. Enter amount of credit for the casting.

2. Press Casting.

3. Complete the transaction as usual.

4. Imprint the form.

Service Centre parts1. Type the product number of a part.

2. Press Service Parts instead of Enter.

3. Complete the transaction as usual.

Ringing in shop labour1. Type the amount.

2. Press Shop Labour.

3. Complete the transaction as usual.

Ringing in store labour1. Type the non-inventory SKU number for store labour.

2. Press Non-Inv SKU.

3. Type the amount of the labour.

4. Complete the transaction as usual.

Price lookup1. Press Inquiry.

2. Type the product number and press Enter.

3. Use Prev and Next as required.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-29Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 234: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Looking up Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card during a sale (swipe inquiry)1. Ring in the items.

2. Press Charge twice.

3. Swipe card or enter account number.

4. Press Inquiry.

5. Press Enter.

6. Ring in more items, if any.

7. Complete the transaction.

Looking up Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card not during a sale (swipe inquiry)1. Press Inquiry.

2. Press Charge.

3. Swipe card or enter account number.

4. Press Enter.

Looking up gift card balances during a sale (swipe inquiry)1. Ring in the items.

2. Press Inquiry.

3. Press Gift Card.

4. Swipe the gift card or enter the account number (if you have not already done so).

5. Tell the customer the balance appearing on your screen.

6. Press Enter to clear the screen.

7. Ring in more items, if any.

8. Complete the transaction.

Looking up gift card balances not during a sale (swipe inquiry)1. Press Inquiry.

2. Press Gift Card.

3. Swipe the gift card or enter the account number.

4. Give the customer the receipt that prints.

5. Press Enter to clear the screen.

7-30 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 235: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Transaction quick reference

Paid outs1. Type the amount removed from the register.

2. Press Paid Out.

3. Press Cash twice.

4. Imprint Paid Out form.

No Sale1. Press Mgt.

2. Type the number 1 and press Enter.

3. (Supervisor enters operator number and password.)

Pickups and loans1. Press Mgt.

2. Type the number 5.

3. (Supervisor enters operator number and password.)

4. Type the number of the tender type and press Enter.

5. Press Void (for pickup) or Mgt (for loan).

6. Type the amount.

Opening CT Money drawer1. Press CT Money Drawer.

2. (Supervisor enters operator number and password.)

Signing on with register offline1. Press Mgt.

2. If menu appears, type the number 1 and press Enter. Type operator # and password.

3. If requested, type float amounts and press Mgt.

� DO NOT SIGN OFF WHILE REGISTER IS STILL OFFLINE.

TeamPOS Cashier Guide 7-31Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 236: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Quick references

Ringing in with register offline1. Ring in item.

2. Type a department number and press Enter.

3. Type the unit price and press Enter.

4. Modify taxes, if necessary.

Reloading the register1. Make sure the cashier is signed off.

2. Press and release the power button on the register.

3. Wait while the register powers off.

4. Press and release the power button again to turn the register back on.

Reloading the configuration1. Press Mgt.

2. Type the number 5.

3. (Supervisor enters operator number and password.)

4. Press Mgt.

Initializing a pinpad1. Press Mgt.

2. Type the number 7.

3. (Supervisor enters operator number and password.)

4. Press Mgt.

7-32 TeamPOS Cashier GuideRetail Systems – July 2005

Page 237: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

Aabout this manual 1-1accepting rain checks 4-32account

entered the wrong account number 5-2account payment

CTC retail card & Options MasterCard 4-23house account 4-24

Auto Club cardrules 4-41selling 4-41

CCanadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card

single and split tender returns 3-12single tender purchases 2-18split tender purchases 2-46

cashadvance 4-22and cheque, split tender purchases 2-39and credit card, split tender purchases 2-42and credit card, split tender returns 3-25and CT ‘Money’, split tender purchases 2-35and CTC promotional coupons, split tender

purchases 2-38and debit card, split tender purchases 2-40and debit card, split tender returns 3-29and manufacturer’s coupon, split tender

purchases 2-37receipt 2-3, 4-31single tender purchases 2-2single tender returns 3-5

Cash Advance key 4-22cash and CT ‘Money’

receipt 2-36Cash key 2-2cash refund

receipt 3-7, 3-8cashier number and password 6-19cashing a cheque 4-25casting 4-27Casting key 4-27changing your password 6-11Charge key 2-7, 2-11, 2-25, 2-42, 2-44, 2-46cheque

and cash, split tender purchases 2-39cashing a cheque 4-25receipt 2-15single tender purchases 2-14traveler’s cheque 2-23

Cheque key 2-14, 2-39Clear key 5-2configuration

reloading 6-8, 6-9correcting mistakes 5-2coupon

Canadian Tire ‘Money’ see CT ‘Money’CTC promotional coupons and cash 2-38manufacturer’s coupon and cash, split tender

purchases 2-37Cr Note Issue key 3-20Cr Note Redeem key 2-32credit

deferred creditsingle tender purchases 2-25single tender returns 3-23

instant credit 2-34start of day 6-7

credit cardand cash, split tender purchases 2-42and cash, split tender returns 3-25and debit card, split tender purchases 2-44and debit card, split tender returns 3-31approval messages 7-3receipt 2-9refunds 3-12single tender purchases 2-7single tender returns 3-12

credit noteissuing on a returned item 3-20redeeming 2-32single tender returns 3-20

CT ‘Money’and cash, split tender purchases 2-35extra or reduced 4-16item is exempt 4-7opening both drawers when signed off 6-5opening CT ‘Money’ drawer 6-5receipt 2-17single tender purchases 2-16

CT ‘Money’ drawer 6-5

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index i Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 238: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

CT ‘Money’ drawer, opening in mid-transaction 6-5

CT Money In key 2-35CT Money key 2-16CTC commercial credit card

receipt 2-12single tender purchases 2-11

CTC Promo key 2-38CTC promotional coupons

and cash, split tender purchases 2-38CTC retail card

account payment 4-23cash advance 4-22see credit

Ddebit card

and cash, split tender purchases 2-40and cash, split tender returns 3-29and credit card, split tender purchases 2-44and credit card, split tender returns 3-31quick reference 7-2receipt 2-5single tender purchases 2-4single tender returns 3-9transaction record 2-6

Debit Card key 2-4, 2-40, 2-44deferred credit

receipt 2-27refund, single tender returns 3-23

Deferred key 2-25, 3-23deposit

applying the deposit to a purchase 4-26refunding a deposit 4-26taking a deposit on a purchase 4-26

Deposit key 4-26discounts

casting value discounted 4-27item discount

taxes and CT ‘Money’ calculated on discounted price 4-11

taxes and CT ‘Money’ calculated on undis-counted price 4-13

on entire purchase 4-9overview 4-9

door, registerclosing 1-10

drawersopening both when signed off 6-5opening CT ‘Money’ drawer 6-5

duplicate receipt 1-5, 6-18

EEHC see Environmental Handling ChargeEnvironmental Handling Charge (EHC) 4-30exemption

CT ‘Money’ on an item 4-7tax on a purchase 4-4

Exit key 4-29extra CT ‘Money’

handling returns 3-2Extra CT Money key 4-16

Ffloat adjustments 6-2

Ggift card

balance inquiry 4-33inquiry

register messages 4-33loadable see loadable gift cardmessages 7-6receipt 2-20redeeming 2-19reloading 4-39selling 4-35single tender purchases 2-19single tender returns 3-16split tender purchases 2-50voiding a sale 4-40

Gift Card key 2-19, 2-50, 3-16Gift Cert key 2-20gift certificate

receipt 2-22redeeming 2-20single tender purchases 2-20

gift registrybest practice 4-44

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index ii Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 239: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

refunding products 4-44ringing in products 4-43

Hhouse account

account payment 4-24charge 2-31

Iincomplete receipt 5-12initialize a pinpad 6-10inquiry

gift cardregister messages 4-33

gift card balance 4-33item lookup 4-29price lookup 4-29swipe inquiry

overview 4-2register messages 4-2stand-alone 4-3, 4-33

Inquiry key 4-29instant credit

single tender purchases 2-34Instant Credit key 2-34invalid entry 5-6issuing a credit note 3-20item

item correct key 5-2lookup 4-29not on file 5-5on sale, sample receipt 1-18wrong price in computer 5-7

Item Correct key 5-2Item Discount key 4-11, 4-13

Kkeyboard

diagram 1-5overview 1-6

keysCash 2-2Cash Advance 4-22Casting 4-27

Charge 2-7, 2-11, 2-25, 2-42, 2-44, 2-46Cheque 2-14, 2-39Clear 5-2Cr Note Issue 3-20Cr Note Redeem 2-32CT ‘Money’ drawer 6-5CT Money 2-16CT Money In 2-35CTC Promo 2-38Debit Card 2-4, 2-40, 2-44Deferred 2-25, 3-23Deposit 4-26Exit 4-29Extra CT Money 4-16Gift Card 2-19, 2-50, 3-16Gift Cert 2-20Inquiry 4-29Instant Credit 2-34Item Correct 5-2Item Discount 4-11, 4-13Manufac Coupon 2-37Mdse Return 3-1, 4-16, 4-26Modify Tax 4-7, 4-13Next 4-29, 5-3Non-inv SKU 4-25, 4-30Paid Out 6-4Payment 4-23, 4-24Previous 4-29, 5-3Price Override 4-32, 5-7Repeat 1-22Resume 4-19Service Parts 4-28Shift 2-23Shop Labour 4-30Surtax 4-6Suspend 4-19Tax Exempt 4-32Trans Discount 4-9Trav Cheq 2-23UPC 1-21US Tender 2-29Void 3-5, 5-2, 5-3, 6-2X 1-22

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index iii Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 240: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

Llabour

shop 4-30store 4-30

linked item 1-22Environmental Handling Charge 4-30

loadable gift cardreloading 4-39selling 4-37

loans and pickups 6-2locking your register 6-13lookup price 4-29

MManufac Coupon key 2-37manufacturer’s coupon

and cash, split tender purchases 2-37MasterCard see credit cardMdse Return key 3-1, 4-16, 4-26messages

gift card 7-6mistakes

account number 5-2amount 5-2correcting 5-2invalid entry 5-6item correct key 5-2product number 5-2wrong tender 5-2

modifyCT ‘Money’ 4-16item price 5-7

Modify Tax key 4-7, 4-13multiple items, ringing in 1-22

NNext key 4-29, 5-3no sale 6-4Non-inv SKU key 4-25, 4-30not on file 5-5

Ooffline

ringing in items 5-11signing on to register 5-9

opening the register drawers without a transaction 6-5

operator number and password 1-11Options MasterCard

account payment 4-23points see swipe inquiry

overriding a price 4-32

Ppaid out 6-4Paid Out key 6-4parts

selling through service centre 4-28password

and cashier number 6-19changing 6-11, 6-12

Payment key 4-23, 4-24pickups and loans 6-2pinpad, initialize 6-10points lookup

see swipe inquiryPrevious key 4-29, 5-3price

correction 5-7looking up 4-29

Price Override key 4-32, 5-7printer

see thermal printerprinting

slip printing 6-17Totals Reading 6-14

Product Inquiry screen 4-29promotional coupons and cash, split tender

transactions 2-38purchases

single tenderCanadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card 2-18cash 2-2cheque 2-14credit card, retail 2-7credit note 2-32CT ‘Money’ 2-16CTC commercial credit card 2-11

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index iv Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 241: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

debit card 2-4deferred credit 2-25gift card 2-19gift certificate 2-20gift registry 4-43instant credit 2-34traveler’s cheque 2-23U.S. tender 2-29

split tenderCanadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card 2-46cash and cheque 2-39cash and credit card 2-42cash and CT ‘Money’ 2-35cash and CTC promotional coupon 2-38cash and debit card 2-40cash and manufacturer’s coupon 2-37credit card and debit card 2-44credit note 2-32gift card 2-50

Rrain checks

accepting rain checks 4-32reads, printing 6-14receipt

cash 2-3cash and CT ‘Money’ 2-36cash purchase 4-31cash refund 3-7, 3-8cheque purchase 2-15commercial credit card purchase 2-12credit card 2-9CT ‘Money’ 2-17debit card 2-5, 2-6deferred credit 2-27duplicate 1-5, 6-18gift card 2-20gift certificate 2-22incomplete 5-12reprint 5-12resumed sale 4-21sample 1-18suspended sale 4-20traveler’s cheque 2-24U.S. tender 2-30, 2-33

redeeming a credit note 2-32refunds

extra CT ‘Money’ 3-2mixed transactions 3-35, 3-39overview 3-1refunding a deposit 4-26single tender

cash 3-5credit card 3-12credit note 3-20debit card 3-9deferred credit 3-23gift card 3-16gift registry 4-44

split tendercash and credit card 3-25cash and debit card 3-29credit card and debit card 3-31debit card and credit card 3-31

registercaring for the register 1-10closing the register door 1-10labelled diagram 1-3locking 6-13opening both drawers when signed off 6-5reloading

configuration 6-9programs 6-8

ringing in when offline 5-11signing on when offline 5-9unlocking 6-13

reloadinggift cards 4-39register configuration 6-8, 6-9

Repeat key 1-22reprint receipt 5-12Resume key 4-19resume transaction

how to 4-19resumed sale

receipt 4-21returns see refundsringing in

bar code 1-21invalid entry 5-6item not in computer 5-5

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index v Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 242: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

item price over $500 5-11item with links 1-22item with no fixed price 1-22item without product number 1-22multiple items 1-22non-inventory SKU numbers 1-21overview 1-19product number 1-20register offline 5-11scanning 1-19screen fills up 1-23shop labour 4-30store labour 4-30UPC code 1-21wrong price in computer 5-7

Ssale item on receipt 1-18sample receipt 1-18scanners

how to use 1-19screen

when the screen fills up 1-23selling gift cards 4-35service centre

selling parts through service centre 4-28Service Parts key 4-28shift end procedures 6-6Shift key 2-23shop labour 4-30Shop Labour key 4-30signing off

normally 6-6shift end procedures 6-6training mode 1-19

signing onnormally 1-12register offline 5-9training mode 1-15

Single 2-11single tender purchases

Canadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card 2-18cash 2-2cheque 2-14credit card 2-7

CT ‘Money’ 2-16CTC commercial credit card 2-11debit card 2-4deferred credit 2-25gift card 2-19gift certificate 2-20instant credit 2-34traveler’s cheque 2-23U.S. tender 2-29wrong tender 5-2

split tender purchasesCanadian Tire ‘Money’ On The Card 2-46cash and cheque 2-39cash and credit card 2-42cash and CT ‘Money’ 2-35cash and CTC promotional coupons 2-38cash and debit card 2-40cash and manufacturer’s coupon 2-37credit card and debit card 2-44gift card 2-50wrong tender 5-2

split tender returnscash and credit card 3-25cash and debit card 3-29debit card and credit card 3-31

start of daycredit 6-7

store labour 4-30Surtax key 4-6surtaxes 4-6Suspend key 4-19suspend transaction 4-19

how to 4-19suspended sale

receipt 4-20swipe inquiry

integrated 2-7, 2-46, 2-50overview 4-2register messages 4-2stand-alone

overview 4-3, 4-33

Ttax

exempt purchases 4-4

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index vi Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 243: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1

Index

looking up tax status of an item 4-29overview 4-4surtax 4-6

Tax Exempt key 4-32thermal printer

cleaning the print head 6-20diagrams 6-16loading paper 6-18replacing the ribbon 6-19

Totals Reading 6-14training mode

exiting 1-19signing off 1-19signing on 1-15

training mode, exiting 1-19Trans Discount key 4-9Trav Cheq key 2-23traveler’s cheque

receipt 2-24single tender purchases 2-23

UU.S. tender

receipt 2-30, 2-33single tender purchases 2-29

unlocking your register 6-13UPC code, ringing in 1-21UPC key 1-21US Tender key 2-29using this manual 1-1

VVisa see credit cardvoid

entire transaction (completed) 5-3entire transaction (in progress) 5-2item 5-2prior transaction 5-3

Void key 3-5, 5-2, 5-3, 6-2voids

gift card sales 4-40

XX key 1-22

TeamPOS Cashier Guide Index vii Retail Systems – July 2005

Page 244: Cashier Guide - members.gvasl.commembers.gvasl.com/.../pos/Point_One_8.0_Cashier_Guide_English.pdf · TeamPOS Cashier Guide 1-1 Retail Systems – July 2005 R80\English\Cashier Guide\Reg.ch1